JP6817383B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, a player refers to a point selection table during a predetermined gaming state (for example, during BB operation), accumulates points by lottery based on an internal winning combination, and according to the accumulated points, a player after the end of the predetermined gaming state. There is known a gaming machine that determines whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the user (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-79698

However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, since the above-mentioned points are simply determined by a lottery based on the internal winning combination, a lottery as to whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. There was a problem that became monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a game capable of performing a more diverse lottery regarding a lottery as to whether or not to notify a procedure of a stop operation which is advantageous to the player. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

The present invention uses symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 93) for determining an internal winning combination. Stop control means (for example, reel stop control process by the main CPU 93) to stop the variation display of the symbol according to the internal lottery process), the stop operation of the player, and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. The reel control process), the special game state control means for controlling the special game state (for example, BB) based on the establishment of the special condition, and the specific stop operation procedure advantageous to the player. The privilege granting determination means including an advantageous gaming state control means for controlling to an advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) and a privilege granting determining means capable of determining whether or not to grant a privilege in the special gaming state. Is a specific lottery for whether or not to update a specific numerical value in the special gaming state, and when the specific numerical value becomes a specific update result when the specific advantageous gaming state is not controlled. Determines the granting of a privilege that enables the transition to the specific advantageous gaming state, and when the specific advantageous gaming state is controlled, when the specific numerical value becomes the specific update result. When it is determined to grant a privilege that enables the addition of the gaming period of the specific advantageous gaming state and the specific advantageous gaming state is controlled, the specific numerical value does not become the specific update result. When the special gaming state ends, the update result in the middle is held until the next special gaming state, and when it is controlled to the specific advantageous gaming state, at least the first character in the special gaming state. And a character determining means capable of determining which of the plurality of characters including the second character is to be displayed, and when controlled to the specific advantageous gaming state, the specific numerical value is said. When the special gaming state ends without a specific update result, the type of character determined to be displayed is also retained until the next special gaming state .

Further, the present invention has a plurality of different lottery which is performed when the specific advantageous gaming state is not controlled and the specific lottery which is performed when the specific advantageous gaming state is controlled. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible to refer to a table .

Further, the present invention is provided with a preferential treatment determining means capable of determining whether or not the addition of the gaming period of the specific advantageous gaming state is a preferential preferential state, and the preferential state is determined. The above-described gaming machine, characterized in that the preferential state is maintained until the granting of a privilege that enables the addition of the gaming period of the specific advantageous gaming state in the special gaming state is determined.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding a lottery as to whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance composition example in the game machine of this embodiment. It shows the internal structure of the game machine of this embodiment, and is the perspective view in the state which the middle door is closed. It shows the internal structure of the game machine of this embodiment, and is the perspective view in the state which the middle door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the inside of the cabinet in the game machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back side of the front door in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the auxiliary control circuit in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the bonus combination in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the replay combination in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small combination and the like in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for the general game state in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for the BB game state in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination decision table for a bonus in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the stop operation order and the winning combination with respect to the internal winning combination in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storage area in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the carry-over combination storage area in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation stop button storage area in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition ART game number lottery table in PBB in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the battle CZ character lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for character A in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for character B in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for character C in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rip continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for the rip continuous character A in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for the rip continuous character B in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for the rip continuous character C in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success or failure lottery table which added the number of ART games at the time of ART winning in battle CZ in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition ART game number lottery table at the time of ART winning in battle CZ in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success or failure lottery table which added the number of ART games in the battle CZ in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition ART game number lottery table in the battle CZ in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the card acquisition success / failure lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the card type lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rip continuous card acquisition success / failure lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rip continuous card type lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success or failure lottery table which added the number of ART games in normal BB in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition ART game number lottery table in normal BB in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART game number lottery table which adds the card surplus time in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in item CZ in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table in ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table in ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table in the rip continuous ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table in ART for the rip continuous enemies A to C in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table in ART for the rip continuous enemy D in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the bell winning number lottery table for addition the number of ART games in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success or failure lottery table which adds the number of ART games at the time of reaching the number of bell prizes in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition ART game number lottery table at the time of reaching the bell prize number in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mode transition lottery table during ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the normal medium mode transition lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mode transition lottery table at the end of ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the BB winning precursor game number lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the game in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on processing which is executed in the main control processing shown in FIG. 63. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 63. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process which is executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 63. It is a flowchart which shows the state management process executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an external signal output management process executed in the state management process shown in FIG. 67. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check process which is executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 63. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation check process which is executed in the main control process shown in FIG. 63. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process by the control of the main CPU in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a communication data transmission process executed in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on processing of the sub CPU in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp control task which is activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 74. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task which is activated in the power-on process shown in FIG. 74. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task which is started in the mother task which was started by the power-on process shown in FIG. 74. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 77. It is a flowchart which shows the effect content determination process executed in the command analysis process shown in FIG. 78. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the start command executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79. It is a flowchart which shows the process during ART game which is executed in the process at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the additional BB process executed in the ART game process shown in FIG. 81. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an ART game end check process executed in the process during the ART game shown in FIG. 81. It is a flowchart which shows the process during battle CZ executed in the process at the time of receiving a start command shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal BB process executed in the process at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process in item CZ executed in the process at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a normal game which is executed in the process at the time of receiving a start command shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a winning operation command executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a bonus end command executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine, which is a specific example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described with reference to each drawing. First, with reference to FIG. 1, the main configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

[Functional flow of pachislot machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 in the present embodiment. In the pachi-slot machine 1, each means shown in FIG. 1 executes necessary processing, and the functions of each are exhibited, so that the player can execute the game.

<Input operation detection means>
The insertion operation detecting means detects an insertion operation of a game medium such as a medal or a coin by a player. When the insertion operation of a predetermined number of game media (for example, three medals) is detected, the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means described later is permitted. Further, in the symbol display means described later, a predetermined winning line is activated (hereinafter, the activated winning line is referred to as an "effective line"). In the present embodiment, the selector 66 for detecting the insertion of medals by the player and the BET switch 77 for detecting the operation of the BET button 22 by the player constitute the insertion operation detecting means. The types of game media that can be detected are not limited to medals, but include coins, tokens, game balls, and electromagnetic game media having equivalent values.

<Start operation detection means>
The start operation detecting means detects a start operation by the player. When the start operation is detected, the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means described later is started. Further, a random number value used when the internal winning combination determining means described later determines the internal winning combination is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Further, the effect random value used when the effect control means described later determines the effect is extracted from within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 32767). In the present embodiment, the start switch 79 that detects the operation of the start lever 23 by the player constitutes the start operation detecting means. The type, number, and numerical range of the extracted random number values are not limited to this, and the number of random number values required for the game can be extracted from within a predetermined numerical range. ..

<Means for determining internal winners>
The internal winning combination determining means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination from a plurality of predetermined combinations. That is, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed on the valid line is determined by the determination of the internal winning combination. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 that refers to various tables and executes the internal lottery process based on the extracted random number values constitutes an internal winning combination determining means. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 can control that the progress of the game is stopped (the game operation of the player is invalidated). Such control is referred to as "locking" (or "freezing"). For convenience, the control that stops the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is called "lock at the start of the game", and the control that stops the progress of the game executed at the end of the game is called "lock at the end of the game". Call. That is, the "lock at the start of the game" is a control in which the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that the operation to the stop button is not effective for a predetermined period after the start lever is operated. "Lock at the end of the game" means that the operation of the bet button or the operation of the start lever is not effective for a predetermined period after the stop button is operated, and the progress of the game is stopped. Control. Of course, the trigger of "locking" is not limited to the above, and for example, after the start lever is operated and one of the stop buttons is operated, the subsequent operation is effective for a predetermined period. It may be possible to perform control that does not become.

Here, the internal winning combination determining means can draw a lottery based on the extracted random number value and decide whether or not to perform "lock" in place of the internal winning combination or together with the internal winning combination. In this case, a plurality of random numbers are extracted, the internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random values, and whether or not to perform "lock" is determined based on the other random value. May be.

<Design display means>
The symbol display means variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns. That is, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the symbol variation display is started, and when the stop control is executed by the stop control means described later, the symbol variation display ends. In the present embodiment, the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the reel display window 4 constitute a symbol display means. The symbol display means is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a symbol image display means (for example, an image display device) that variablely displays a plurality of symbol images in a plurality of columns.

<Stop operation detection means>
The stop operation detecting means detects a stop operation by the player. When the stop operation is detected, the stop control means described later stops the symbol variation display by the symbol display means. In the present embodiment, the stop switch board 80 for detecting the operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R by the player constitutes the stop operation detecting means.

When all the reels are rotating, the first reel stop operation is the first stop operation, the stop operation performed after the first stop operation is the second stop operation, and the second stop operation is followed by the second stop operation. The stop operation performed is called a third stop operation.

<Stop control means>
The stop control means controls the stop of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display means. That is, when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display means is stopped based on the stop control information set according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Control. In the present embodiment, when the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are operated by the player, the reel stop control process for stopping and controlling the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed with reference to various stop control information. The main control circuit 91 constitutes a stop control means.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for one symbol. The maximum number of sliding pieces is not limited to these, and can be set as appropriate.

The stop control means uses the above-mentioned specified time to display the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed as much as possible along the effective line according to the determination result of the internal winning combination. Stop the rotation of the reel within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

On the other hand, depending on the decision result of the internal winning combination, the maximum sliding piece so that it will not be displayed along the valid line by using the above specified time for the combination of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed. Stop the rotation of the reel within the range of the number.

In addition, the stop control means is such that the determined internal winning combination changes the combination of symbols displayed according to a predetermined stop operation order (for example, the order in which a plurality of stop buttons are operated). At a certain time, the rotation of the corresponding reel is controlled to be stopped with reference to the predetermined stop operation sequence.

<Winning judgment means>
The winning determination means determines whether or not there is a winning according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. That is, when the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the winning or non-winning of the winning combination is determined based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 that refers to the symbol combination table and the like and executes the winning search process based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means constitutes the winning determination means.

<Profit-giving means>
When the winning determination means determines that there is a winning, the profit-giving means grants a profit according to the combination of the winning symbols. That is, the corresponding profit is given to the player according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 that executes the medal payout process or the like based on the result of the prize search process constitutes a profit-giving means. When the profit to be given is given by the control of the sub control circuit 101, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes the profit giving means.

Here, as the profit given by the profit-giving means, the payout of medals, the operation of the re-game in which the same amount of game media as the current game is automatically inserted, and the game can be played again, and the inside related to the re-game Operation of the replay high probability state (replay time) that increases the winning probability of the winning combination, operation of the special gaming state (bonus) that increases the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals, and the appropriate stop operation for the player By notifying the procedure of, it is possible to cite the operation of a specific gaming state (assist time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals is high. The profits given by the profit-giving means are not limited to this.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the player's throwing operation is detected by the throwing operation detecting means and the player's starting operation is detected by the starting operation detecting means, the internal winning combination determining means, etc. Is determined, and the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means is started. Then, when the stop operation of the player is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the stop control means controls the stop of the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, and the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is the winning determination means. If it is determined that the combination of symbols is related to the winning, the profit-giving means gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols. The above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine.

<Direction control means>
The effect control means draws a lot based on the extracted random value for effect and other information (for example, information about the internal winning combination), and determines the one to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effects. In addition, the effect control means controls the effect execution means described later so that the determined effect is appropriately executed. In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 that refers to various tables, determines the effect content based on at least the extracted random value for the effect, and executes the effect according to the determined effect content is the effect control. Configure means. The above-mentioned "rock" can also be considered as one aspect of the production. In this case, the main control circuit 91 constitutes the effect control means.

Further, when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, the effect control means determines an effect for notifying the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information on the stop operation order and information on the game history). In this case, the effect control means can also be called a notification control means.

<Direction execution means>
The effect executing means executes the effect determined by the effect control means. That is, it means various devices used for effects such as display devices and lamps that perform visual effects, speakers that perform auditory effects, and effect buttons that perform tactile effects. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11, the LED85, and the speakers 42,58,64,65L, 65R constitute the effect executing means. The effect executing means is not limited to these, and may be, for example, a movable body (accessory) provided at a position visible from the front side of the pachislot machine 1, or a plurality of reels (for example, a plurality of reels (for example). The reels 3L, 3C, 3R) may be varied and displayed in a mode different from the normal pattern variable display mode to execute the effect.

In addition, when the effect control means determines the effect for notifying the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information on the stop operation order and information on the game history), the effect execution means is determined. Notify the player of the information. In this case, the effect executing means can also be called a notification means.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5.

<Appearance structure>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

The exterior body 2 of the pachi-slot machine 1 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a. The handle 7 is a recess for carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will also be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at equal intervals along the circumferential direction.

An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 forms the upper part of the front door 2b.
The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. The liquid crystal display device 11 is arranged below the upper panel unit 10, and performs an effect by displaying an image.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player.

The symbol display area 4 is arranged on the front side overlapping the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration capable of transmitting the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the display window 4. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is also referred to as a reel display window 4.

When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, the upper, middle, and lower stages of the plurality of types of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the frame thereof are displayed. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each area of. Further, one or a plurality of lines formed by combining any of three predetermined areas of the upper, middle, and lower stages facing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R of the reel display window 4 are defined as effective lines. Will be done. In the present embodiment, a line (center line) formed by combining the regions of the middle stages facing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is defined as an effective line.

The reel display window 4 is formed by a frame member 13 provided on the pedestal portion 12. The frame member 13 has a reel display window 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button mounting portion 15.

The information display window 14 is continuously provided at the lower part of the reel display window 4 and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16.

The window cover 16 is arranged on the inner surface side of the frame member 13 and cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b. Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet mounting portion 17 facing the opening of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. A seat member (information sheet) on which information about the game is described is arranged between the seat mounting portion 17 and the window cover 16. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with a window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps.

Since the window cover 16 constituting the information sheet mounting portion is not removable from the front side of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface with no irregularities or gaps, the pachislot machine can be used by using the information sheet mounting portion. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that access the inside of 1. The exchange of information sheets will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. However, the information display window according to the game machine of the present invention may be provided below the reel display window and may not be continuous with the reel display window. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 may be formed as two openings arranged in the vertical direction.

The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14, and is formed on a flat surface facing the front. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R penetrate. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are associated with each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

The stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R indicate an example of the operation means to be operated by the player. Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal insertion slot 21, a BET button 22, and a start lever 23 as operating means to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 21 is provided to receive medals dropped from the outside by the player. The medals accepted in the medal slot 21 will be inserted into one game up to a predetermined number of medals, and the amount exceeding the specified number can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function).

The BET button 22 is provided to determine the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to be inserted into one game. The start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

A 7-segment display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 24 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot (hereinafter, the number of credits). ..

Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12. The side panel units 26L and 26R each have a light source, and perform an effect by the light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the side panel unit 26L. The checkout button 27 is provided to pull out the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1.

A lumbar panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal portion 12. The lumbar panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

Below the lumbar panel unit 31, a medal payout outlet 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout outlet 32 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 51, which will be described later, to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout port 32 are stored in the medal tray unit 34. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound effects, music, and the like according to the content of the production.

<Internal structure>
3 and 4 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back surface side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. Further, FIG. 4 shows a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b. Further, FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the inside of the cabinet 2a. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the back surface side of the front door 2b.

The cabinet 2a has a top plate 20a, a bottom plate 20b, left and right side plates 20c and 20d, and a back plate 20e (see FIG. 5). A cabinet-side speaker 42 is arranged on the upper side inside the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is attached to the back plate 20e of the cabinet 2a via the mounting brackets 43L and 43R.
The cabinet-side speaker 42 is, for example, a speaker for outputting a sound effect.

When the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, the cabinet side relay board 44 is arranged on the left side of the cabinet side speaker 42. The cabinet-side relay board 44 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, a game medal auxiliary storage switch (not shown), and a medal. The wiring connected to the payout count switch (not shown) is relayed.

An amplifier board 45 for controlling the sound output by the cabinet-side speaker 42 is arranged in the central portion inside the cabinet 2a. The amplifier board 45 is attached to a mounting shelf 46 fixed to the left and right side plates 20c and 20d.

Further, when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, an external centralized terminal plate 47 is arranged on the right side of the amplifier board 45. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is attached to the right side plate 20d of the cabinet 2a. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

When the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, the sub power supply device 48 is arranged on the left side of the amplifier board 45. The sub power supply device 48 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The sub power supply device 48 supplies electric power having an AC voltage of 100 V to the power supply device 53 described later. Further, the power of AC voltage 100V is converted into the power of DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier board 45.

A medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged below the inside of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 20b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when, for example, the number of stored medals exceeds 50, or when the settlement button is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 32 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is engaged with the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be removable from the bottom plate 20b.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 7).
The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 20c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device 48 into the power of the DC voltage required in each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

As shown in FIGS. 3, 4, and 6, the middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) can be opened and closed from the back side. Door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c are provided on the upper part and the lower part of the middle door 41. The door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 41 in a state where the reel display window 4 is closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 41, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c to release the fixing of the middle door 41.

A main control board case 55 containing the main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) and three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the middle door 41. A stepping motor is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

As shown in FIG. 4, when the middle door 41 is opened, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17 are exposed. As described above, an information sheet on which information about the game is described is arranged between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17. This information sheet is inserted into the gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened to expose the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17. The window. Also, when exchanging the information sheet, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

The main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56. This setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the set value in the pachi-slot machine 1 or confirming the set value in the pachi-slot machine 1. In the present embodiment, the main control board unit is composed of the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 constitutes a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

A sub-control board case 57 for accommodating the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 7) is arranged above the middle door 41. The sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57 constitutes the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 will be described later.

A center speaker 58 is arranged above the sub-control board case 57. A fan 59 is arranged on the left side of the center speaker 58 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. That is, the fan 59 is arranged on the upper portion of the front door 2b on the back surface side. The fan 59 blows air downward to air-cool the inside of the pachislot machine 1.

A sub-relay board 61 is arranged on the right side of the sub-control board case 57 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The sub-relay board 61 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, it is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and the boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. Examples of the substrate arranged around the sub-control substrate 72 include LED substrates 62A and 62B described later.

The LED boards 62A and 62B are arranged above the sub-control board case 57 when viewed from the back surface side of the front door 2b. The LED substrates 62A and 62B emit light of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 85 (see FIG. 7) showing a specific example of a light source in response to an effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 8). And display the blinking pattern. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED substrates in addition to the LED substrates 62A and 62B.

A 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 is arranged below the sub-relay board 61. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history of the middle door 41. Further, when the middle door 41 is opened, a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 is output to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101).

A board speaker 64 and lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41. The board speaker 64 faces the lumbar panel unit 31 (see FIG. 2), and the lower speakers 65L and 65R face the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are arranged above the lower speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of medals are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (not shown) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, a door relay terminal plate 68 is arranged below the reel display window 4 in a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 (see FIG. 4). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub control board 72 (see FIG. 7), a selector 66, and a game operation display board 81. It is a board that relays wiring with (see FIG. 7). Examples of various buttons and switches include a BET button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

[Control system of pachislot machine]
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 arranged on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 arranged on the front door 2b. The main control board 71 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a power supply board 53b of the power supply device 53. It is connected. The setting key type switch 56, the external centralized terminal plate 47, the hopper device 51, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44. Since the external centralized terminal plate 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 penetrates the switch through hole described later in the medal auxiliary storage 52. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

A power switch 53a is connected to the power supply board 53b of the power supply device 53. The power switch 53a is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and the like via a door relay terminal board 68. The sub-relay board 61 is connected. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The BET switch 77 detects that the BET button 22 has been pressed by the player. The checkout switch 78 detects that the checkout button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. A stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 80. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 24 when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when the replay is performed. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 24 and an LED 82 are connected to the game operation display board 81. The LED 82 lights, for example, a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. The sound I / O board 84, the LED boards 62A and 62B, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 are connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.
Since the LED boards 62A and 62B and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The sound I / O board 84 outputs audio to the center speaker 58, the board speaker 64, and the lower speakers 65L and 65R. Further, the sound I / O board 84, together with the amplifier board 45, outputs sound to the canet side speaker 42.

Further, the ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing images (video) for production, audio, LED boards 62A and 62B and other LED boards (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 has a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and is provided at a predetermined position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit are connected by rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed between them.

Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols. Therefore, for example, when the left stop button 19L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the reel display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to the symbol four ahead thereof are the symbols of the reel display window 4. It becomes a symbol that can be stopped in the middle stage.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the sub-control circuit 101 composed of the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 6) based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light by a light source such as an LED85, and speakers 42, 58, 64. , 65L, 65R and the like include voice control tasks that control the output of sound from speakers.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. Further, a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like are included.

The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers such as the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content.
Further, the sub CPU 102 controls turning on and off of a light source such as LED85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

[Transition of game state]
Next, the gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 93 has, as the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1, a general gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, RT3 gaming state or RT4 gaming state) and a BB gaming state (PBB gaming state, RT0 gaming state during BB). , BB medium RT2 gaming state or BB medium RB gaming state) is designed to change, respectively.

<Transition of general game state>
As shown in FIG. 10, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state are defined as the general gaming states. Note that "RT" is an abbreviation for "replay time", and the RT0 to RT4 gaming states are gaming states for identifying that the winning probabilities of the replay combination, which is the operating combination of the replay, are different.

In the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to "8978/65536" (see FIG. 16), and in the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to "41792/65536". It is set (see FIG. 16). Further, in the RT4 game state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to "12000/65536". That is, the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state are replay low probability states (low RT game state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively low as compared with the RT2-4 game states, and the RT2 game state and the RT3 game state. Is a replay high probability state (high RT game state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively high as compared with the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the RT4 game state. Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively high as compared with the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, but the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively low as compared with the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state. It is a medium probability state (medium RT game state).

The winning probability of the replay combination in each RT game state (including the PBB game state described later, the RT0 game state in BB, the RT2 game state in BB, or the RB game state in BB) is limited to those described above (or described later). It can be set as appropriate. For example, the winning probability of the replay combination in the RT3 gaming state is set to be higher than the winning probability of the replay combination in the RT2 gaming state, and the winning probability of the replay combination gradually increases from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It may be configured as follows. Further, for example, the winning probability of the replay winning combination in the RT4 gaming state may be set to be the same as or equivalent to the winning probability of the replay winning combination in the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state.

The setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is changed in the state where the pachislot machine 1 is first installed in the playground, the backup error of the main RAM 95 occurs in the pachislot machine 1, the entire storage area is initialized (initial state), and the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is changed. If (after changing the setting), or when the PBB game state, the RT0 game state during BB, or the RB game state during BB, which will be described later, ends, the game state is shifted to the RT0 game state.

In the RT0 game state, RT2 game state, or RT3 game state, when any combination of symbols of RT1 transition rips 1 to 16 described later wins a prize, or any combination of symbols of RT1 transition symbols 1 to 8 is valid. When it is displayed on the line, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state.

In the RT1 gaming state, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip 1 or the RT2 transition lip 2 described later wins a prize, the gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state. Further, in the RT2 gaming state, when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip 1 or the RT3 transition lip 2 described later wins a prize, the gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state.

When the bonus combination (in this embodiment, either PBB or BB1 to 4 described later), which is the operating combination of the bonus, is internally won in the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, or the RT3 gaming state. To shift the gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. The bonus combination retains its internal winning state from the time it is internally won until it is won. This is called "carry-over", and the bonus role is also called "carry-over". In addition, the RT4 game state, which is the internal winning state of the bonus role, is also called "between flags". The bonus combination is drawn only in the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, and is not drawn in the RT4 gaming state and the BB gaming state described later (excluding the BB medium RB in the BB medium RT0 gaming state).

The transition trigger of each RT game state is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set as appropriate.
For example, after one transition opportunity is established, the RT gaming state may be shifted by using a predetermined number of games as another transition trigger. It is also possible to adopt only a part of the above-mentioned transition opportunities.

<Transition of BB game state>
As shown in FIG. 10, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the PBB game state, the RT0 game state in BB, the RT2 game state in BB, or the RB game state in BB is defined as the BB game state. In addition, "BB" is an abbreviation for "big bonus", and "RB" is an abbreviation for "regular bonus". Further, "BB" is also referred to as "a continuous operation device for a type 1 special accessory", and "RB" is also referred to as a "type 1 special accessory". It should be noted that the "BB" may be the "continuous operation device for the second-class special accessory", and the "RB" may be the "second-class special accessory". The PBB gaming state and the RB gaming state during BB are advantageous gaming states for the player because the winning probability of the small winning combination is relatively high as compared with the general gaming state. In the BB game state, more than the specified number of medals (297 in the PBB game state, 44 in the RT0 game state in BB, RT2 game state in BB, and 44 in the RB game state in BB) are paid out during the BB game state. If there is, it ends.

In the RT4 gaming state, when a combination of PBB symbols, which will be described later, wins a prize, the gaming state is shifted to the PBB gaming state. Further, in the PBB game state, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (297 medals) is paid out, the game state is shifted to the RT0 game state.

In the RT4 game state, when any combination of symbols 1 to 4 described later wins a prize, the game state is shifted to the RT0 game state in BB. Further, in the RT0 gaming state during BB, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (44) is paid out, the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 game state during BB, if the RB during BB is internally elected before the specified number of medals (44 medals) is paid out, the game state is shifted to the RT2 game state during BB. The RT2 gaming state during BB is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively high as compared with the RT0 gaming state during BB (see FIG. 17).

In the RT2 gaming state during BB, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (44) is paid out, the gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state. That is, in the BB game state in which the combination of any of the symbols BB1 to 4 described later is won, the replay high probability state (high RT game state) is based on the internal winning of the RB in the BB. When the BB game state ends as it is, the replay high probability state (high RT game state) is inherited even in the general game state after the end of the BB game state. On the other hand, in the RT2 game state during BB, if the RB during BB is won before the specified number of medals (44 medals) is paid out, the game shifts to the RB game state during BB, and the RB game state during BB When the number of medals exceeding the specified number (44) is paid out, the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state. That is, even when the RB in the BB shifts to the replay high probability state (high RT game state) based on the internal winning, if the RB in the BB wins a prize, the general game after the end of the BB game state The state becomes a replay low probability state (low RT game state).

In addition, the RB game state in BB ends based on the winning of 8 small wins or 12 games, but in the present embodiment, in most cases, any of these is performed. Before the end condition is satisfied, the end condition of the BB game state (the number of medals exceeding the specified number (44 medals) has been paid out) is satisfied. Therefore, RT0 after the end of the RB game state during BB. It is decided to shift to the game state. Therefore, if the end condition of the RB game state during BB is satisfied and the end condition of the BB game state is not yet satisfied, the game state is changed based on the condition that the end condition of the RB game state during BB is satisfied. It will shift to the RT0 game state during BB. As described above, the RT0 gaming state during BB (including the RT2 gaming state during BB) is also called the "BB general gaming state" because it is a state in which the BB gaming state has not shifted to the RB gaming state during BB.

[Data table stored in the main ROM]
Next, various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 19.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 11 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol position data "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "Red 7", "Red BAR", "White BAR", "Black BAR", "Bell", "Replay 1", "Replay 2", "Watermelon", "Cherry" and "Blank". ”Is included.

Here, "Replay 1" and "Replay 2" need only be able to identify the main CPU 93 as internally different symbols, and in the present embodiment, the symbols can be recognized by the player as if they were the same symbol. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, "Replay 1" and "Replay 2" are also collectively referred to as "Replay".

<Design code table>
As shown in FIG. 12, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and in the present embodiment, it is distinguished by 2 bytes (16 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 12 represents a symbol code as data for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 11 has been described as representing an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, but is actually stored in the main ROM 94. The symbol arrangement table represents an arrangement of symbol codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R.

In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are "red 7", "red BAR", "white BAR", "black BAR", "bell", "replay 1", and "replay 2" as described above. , "Watermelon", "Cherry" and "Blank".

In the symbol code table, "1" is assigned as the symbol code for the "red 7" symbol. Further, "2" is assigned as a symbol code for the "white BAR" symbol. Further, "3" is assigned as a symbol code for the "black BAR" symbol.

Similarly, "4" to "10" are assigned as symbol codes for the symbols of "bell", "replay 1", "replay 2", "watermelon", "cherry" and "blank", respectively.

<Design combination table>
In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the winning operation flag and the number of payouts are associated with the combination of symbols identified by the storage area identification data represented by 16 bytes.

The winning operation flag is data assigned corresponding to a combination of unique symbols for representing a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "winning combination"), and includes 1-byte (8-bit) data and a storage area type. I'm out. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data.
The 1-byte data includes data corresponding to a combination of a plurality of symbols. The combination of each symbol is distinguished by the storage area type and the 1-byte data.

In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, in order to make the invention easier to understand, the name (content) of the winning combination is associated with the winning operation flag for each combination of symbols.

The payout number is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player corresponding to each combination of symbols. When the combination of symbols lined up along the valid line matches the "combination of symbols" in the symbol combination table, the number of medals paid out or the number of credits driven by the hopper device 51 is counted based on the corresponding number of payouts. Credit counters are added.

FIG. 13 shows a symbol combination table related to a bonus combination (including RB in BB).
When the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 13 is displayed on the valid line, it means that the medal is not paid out, but the winning combination of the bonus is won. That is, when the bonus combination is won, it shifts to the BB game state (in the case of RB during BB, the RB game state during BB).

In FIG. 13, when the combination of the symbols of "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7" indicating the winning combination of "PBB" is displayed on the effective line in the general gaming state (RT4 gaming state), the medal Although there is no payout, it means that the player has won the PBB and the game shifts to the PBB game state. The "PBB" is a "determining role" that determines the transition to the ART game in the normal game described later, and determines the addition of the number of ART sets and the number of ART games in the ART game.

A combination of "Red 7-Red 7-Red BAR" symbols indicating the winning combination of "BB1", a combination of "Red 7-Red 7-White BAR" indicating the winning combination of "BB2", and a combination of "BB3" The combination of either the "white BAR-white BAR-white BAR" symbol indicating the winning combination or the "white BAR-white BAR-red BAR" symbol combination indicating the winning combination of "BB4" If it is displayed on the valid line in the general gaming state (RT4 gaming state), the medal is not paid out, but it means that the player has won the BB, and the game shifts to the BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state during BB).

Here, the combination of the symbols of "BB1" and "BB3" is composed of the symbols of "Red 7" and "Red BAR" or "White BAR". That is, it is a combination of symbols composed of symbols of the same color. Further, the combination of the symbols of "BB2" and "BB4" is composed of "red 7" and "white BAR", or "white BAR" and "red BAR". That is, it is a combination of symbols composed of different colored symbols. Hereinafter, "BB1" and "BB3" are collectively referred to as "same color bonus", and "BB2" and "BB4" are also collectively referred to as "different color bonus".

If the combination of "white BAR-blank-blank" symbols indicating the winning combination of "RB in BB" is displayed on the valid line in the RT2 game state in BB, no medal is paid out, but in BB. It means that he has won a prize in RB, and shifts to the RB game state during BB. In addition, "RB in BB" is also called "JAC".

FIG. 14 shows a symbol combination table related to the replay combination. When the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 14 is displayed on the valid line, it means that the medal is not paid out, but the player wins the replaying combination. That is, if the replay combination wins, the replay can be performed in the next game.

In FIG. 14, the combination of the symbols of "Replay 1-Replay 1-Replay 1" indicating the winning combination of "Normal Lip 1" and "Replay 1-Replay 2-Replay 1" indicating the winning combination of "Normal Lip 2" Combination of symbols, combination of symbols of "Replay 1-Replay 1-Replay 2" indicating the winning combination of "Normal Lip 3", "Replay 1-Replay 2-Replay 2" indicating the winning combination of "Normal Lip 4" Combination of symbols, combination of symbols of "Replay 2-Replay 2-Replay 2" indicating the winning combination of "Normal Lip 5", "Replay 2-Replay 1-Replay 2" indicating the winning combination of "Normal Lip 6" A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols of "Replay 2-Replay 2-Replay 1" indicating a winning combination of "Normal Lip 7", or a "Replay 2-Replay 1-Replay 1" indicating a winning combination of "Normal Lip 8". When any combination of symbols is displayed on the effective line, the symbols of "replay" are aligned in the middle row in the display window 4.

A combination of "Bell-Bell-Red 7" symbols indicating the winning combination of "RT1 Transition Lip 1", a combination of "Bell-Bell-Watermelon" symbols indicating the winning combination of "RT1 Transition Lip 2", and "RT1 Transition" A combination of "Bell-Bell-Black BAR" symbols indicating the winning combination of "Rip 3", a combination of "Red 7-Watermelon-Bell" indicating the winning combination of "RT1 Transition Lip 4", or a "RT1 Transition Lip" If any combination of symbols of "white BAR-watermelon-bell" indicating the winning combination of "5" is displayed on the valid line, "replay" is displayed in the lower or upper row in the display window 4. The patterns are aligned.
Although the "replay" symbols are not aligned in the lower or upper row in the display window 4, the combination of the symbols "RT1 transition lip 6" to "RT1 transition lip 16" is defined as a combination of symbols having the same performance. ing. When any combination of symbols from "RT1 transition lip 1" to "RT1 transition lip 16" is displayed on the valid line, the gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

A combination of "Replay 1-Watermelon Bell" symbols that indicate the winning combination of "RT2 Transition Lip 1" or a combination of "Replay 2-Watermelon Bell" symbols that indicate the winning combination of "RT2 Transition Lip 2" is effective. When it is displayed on the line, the gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

A combination of "Bell-Replay 1-Bell" symbols indicating the winning combination of "RT3 Transition Lip 1" or a combination of "Bell-Replay 2-Bell" symbols indicating the winning combination of "RT3 Transition Lip 2" is effective. When it is displayed on the line, the "replay" symbols are aligned upward to the right in the display window 4, and the gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, only the above-mentioned center line is defined as an effective line, but a combination of symbols related to the replay combination (for example, RT1 transition rips 1 to 5 and RT3 transition rips 1 and 2). Is configured as shown in FIG. 14, and the combination of symbols related to the small combination described later in the description of FIG. 15 (for example, cross-down bells 1 to 4, upper bells 1 to 4, and cross-up bell) is also the same. By configuring in, 5 lines (center line aligned in the middle row, top line aligned in the upper row, bottom line aligned in the lower row, cross-down line aligned in the lower right, cross-up line aligned in the upward right) are effective lines. It is possible to impress the player as if.

When the combination of the symbols of "black BAR-black BAR-black BAR" indicating the winning combination of "BAR matching lip" is displayed on the valid line, the transition to the ART game is confirmed in the normal game described later. In the ART game, the number of ART sets and the number of ART games are added.
That is, the "BAR matching lip" is a "fixed role". In addition, the combination of the symbols of the "BAR matching lip" may not be displayed on the effective line depending on the timing of the player's stop operation ("missing" described later may occur), so that the "BAR matching lip" The combination of symbols of "BAR follow-up 1" to "BAR follow-up 12" that is allowed to be displayed on the effective line together with the combination of symbols is specified. However, as will be described later, it is permitted that the combination of the symbols of "BAR Follow Lip 1" to "BAR Follow Lip 12" is displayed on the valid line even if it is not the combination of the symbols of "BAR Matching Lip". May be done ("BAR Matching Fake Lip"). In this case, the player performs a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol to maintain the expectation that the combination of the "BAR matching lip" symbols may be aligned until the third stop operation. Is possible.

FIG. 15 shows a symbol combination table related to a small winning combination or the like with medals paid out. Except for "RT1 transition symbol 1" to "RT1 transition symbol 8", when the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 15 is displayed on the valid line, the number of medals to be paid out associated with the combination of symbols is displayed. It will be paid out. However, the combination of the symbols of "RT1 transition symbol 1" to "RT1 transition symbol 8" may be defined as a combination of symbols related to a small winning combination with a medal (for example, one) paid out.

In FIG. 15, when the combination of the symbols of "Replay 1-Bell-Replay 1" indicating the winning combination of "Crossdown Bell 1" is displayed on the effective line, the "bell" is displayed downward to the right in the display window 4. ", And 9 medals will be paid out. The same applies to "cross-down bell 2" to "cross-down bell 4" as in "cross-down bell 1".

When the combination of "Replay 1-Replay 1-Cherry" symbols indicating the winning combination of "Upper Bell 1" is displayed on the valid line, the "Bell" symbols are aligned in the upper row in the display window 4. Nine medals will be paid out. The same applies to "upper bell 2" to "upper bell 4" as in "upper bell 1".

When the combination of the "watermelon-bell-cherry" symbols indicating the winning combination of the "cross-up bell" is displayed on the effective line, the "bell" symbols are aligned upward to the right in the display window 4, and 9 One medal will be paid out. When the combination of "Bell-bell-bell" symbols indicating the winning combination of "middle bell" is displayed on the effective line, the "bell" symbols are aligned in the middle row in the display window 4, and nine sheets are displayed. The medal will be paid out.

If a combination of "Replay 1-Blank-Bell" symbols indicating the winning combination of "Left Follow Small Win 1" is displayed on the valid line, one medal will be paid out. The same applies to "left follow small role 2" to "left follow small role 16" as in "left follow small role 1".

If a combination of "Red 7-Bell-Bell" symbols indicating the winning combination of "Medium Follow Small Role 1" is displayed on the valid line, one medal will be paid out. The same applies to "medium follow small role 2" to "left follow small role 12" as in "medium follow small role 1".

If a combination of "Red 7-Cherry-Bell" symbols indicating the winning combination of "Right Follow Small Winning 1" is displayed on the valid line, one medal will be paid out. The same applies to "right follow small role 2" to "left follow small role 4" as well as "right follow small role 1".

As will be described later in the description of FIG. 20, the “following small combination” means, for example, when “left middle right bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination as the “pushing order small combination”, “left middle”. When the stop operation is performed in the stop operation order of "right", the stop operation order becomes the correct answer and the combination of any of the symbols "upper bell 1" to "upper bell 4" is displayed preferentially. Stop control will be performed and 9 medals will be paid out, but if the stop operation is performed in any other stop operation order, the stop operation order will be incorrect, so "upper bell 1" to "upper" "Left follow small role 1", "Left follow small role 2", "Left follow small role 5", "Left follow small role 6", "Left follow small role 9" so as not to win any of "Bell 4" , "Left follow small win 10", "Left follow small win 13" and "Left follow small win 14", stop control is performed so that one or more combinations of symbols are preferentially displayed. Become. In addition, since the "following small role" causes "missing" described later, in this case, the medal is not paid out, and any one of "RT1 transition symbol 1" to "RT1 transition symbol 8" described later. The combination of symbols will be displayed.

The combination of the "cherry-black BAR-cherry" symbol indicating the winning combination of "middle cherry 1" or the combination of the "cherry-cherry-cherry" symbol indicating the winning combination of "middle cherry 2" is on the effective line. If it is displayed, one medal will be paid out.

If a combination of "black BAR-black BAR-red BAR" symbols indicating the winning combination of "strong cherry 1" is displayed on the valid line, two medals will be paid out. The same applies to "strong cherry 2" to "strong cherry 10" as in "strong cherry 1".

If a combination of "black BAR-black BAR-cherry" symbols indicating the winning combination of "weak cherry 1" is displayed on the valid line, two medals will be paid out. The same applies to "weak cherry 2" and "weak cherry 3" as well as "weak cherry 1". The combination of the "strong cherry" and "weak cherry" symbols is configured so that the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the lower part of the display window 4 corresponding to the left reel 3L.

When the combination of the symbols of "Red BAR-Watermelon-Replay 2" indicating the winning combination of "Watermelon 1" is displayed on the valid line, four medals are paid out. The same applies to "watermelon 2" to "watermelon 4" as in "watermelon 1". As for the combination of the symbols of "watermelon 1", the symbols of "watermelon" are aligned upward in the display window 4, and the combinations of the symbols of "watermelon 2" and "watermelon 3" are downward in the display window 4. The "watermelon" symbols are aligned with each other, and the combination of the "watermelon 4" symbols is configured so that the "watermelon" symbols are aligned in the middle of the display window 4.

A combination of "red BAR-black BAR-blank" symbols indicating the winning combination of "special small winning combination 1" or a combination of "white BAR-blank-black BAR" indicating the winning combination of "special small winning combination 2" Is displayed on the valid line, one medal is paid out.

If the combination of "Replay 1-Cherry-Bell" symbols indicating the winning combination of "RT1 transition symbol 1" is displayed along the valid line, no medals will be paid out and the game status will be the RT1 gaming status. Move to. The same applies to "RT1 transition symbol 2" to "RT1 transition symbol 8" as in "RT1 transition symbol 1". Strictly speaking, the "RT1 transition symbol" is not a "winning combination" but a part of a combination of "missing" symbols, but it should be recognized that the "RT1 transition symbol" is displayed by the main CPU 93. In order to enable this, it is specified in the symbol combination table shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned names are given to the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination, the combination of the symbols related to the replay combination, and the combination of the symbols related to the small combination, etc. so as to be distinguished from others. , The name does not necessarily limit the role of the combination of the symbols.

Further, without providing the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, for example, the main CPU 93 controls to identify the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line by using the symbol code shown in FIG. 11. You may. That is, it suffices if the main CPU 93 can identify the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line, and the control method thereof is not limited to the one using the symbol combination table.

<Internal lottery table>
In the plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, lottery values and data pointers for each game state are associated with the winning numbers. The internal lottery table is usually stored in the main ROM 94 for each set value (for example, set values 1 to 6) of the pachi-slot machine 1. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, one internal lottery table will be used for each description.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and whether or not the subtraction result is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data pointer (that is, the internal winning combination) associated with the winning number will be determined. When "0" is specified as the lottery value, the data pointer (that is, the internal winning combination) associated with the winning number is not determined in the game state (that is, the lottery). Will not be done). When the number of times of the determination processing as to whether or not the subtraction result is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery processing becomes "missing".

The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)". In the present embodiment, by properly using a plurality of types of internal lottery tables, the types of internal winning combinations and the winning probabilities to be determined are changed, and as a result, the expectations held by the player are undulated.

The data pointer is data acquired as a result of a lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and is data for designating the internal winning combination defined by the internal winning combination determination table described later.

That is, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data in the small winning combination / replay winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18 and the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. .. As the data pointer, a small winning combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

The method of internal lottery processing is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, a lottery random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is used for lottery according to each winning number. The internal lottery may be performed by sequentially adding the values and determining whether the result of the addition is a predetermined value (for example, whether the value is equal to or more than a predetermined value for each winning number).

Further, without providing the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, for example, the main CPU 93 may perform a predetermined calculation on the lottery random number value to control the internal winning combination. .. That is, it suffices if the main CPU 93 can determine the internal winning combination based on the extracted lottery random number value, and the control method is not limited to the one using the internal lottery table.

(Internal lottery table for general game status)
As shown in FIG. 16, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state referred to in the general gaming state sets the lottery value of each winning number in the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state. It stipulates. In the internal lottery table for the general game state, in the winning numbers "1" to "38", the bonus combination (excluding RB in BB) is won alone or in duplicate with the replay combination or small combination, and the winning number "39" ~ "63", the replay combination is won, the winning numbers "64" to "83" are configured to win the small combination, and the winning number "84" is configured so that the RB in the BB wins independently. .. In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state and the internal lottery table for the BB gaming state, which will be described later, have the same configuration, but may have different configurations.

In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers "1" to "38" are common to the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, and differ only in the RT4 gaming state. This is because the RT4 gaming state is the internal winning state of the bonus combination, and the bonus combination is not drawn again. However, since the lottery values for small wins that could have been determined in the winning numbers "1" to "38" are added and assigned in the winning numbers "76" to "82", the RT0 to RT4 gaming states In, there is no change in the winning probability of a small winning combination.

In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers "39" to "63" are different for each of the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. That is, the type of replay combination drawn by each of the RT0 to RT4 gaming states and the winning probability vary. In the RT0 game state, the lottery value "8318" is assigned to the winning number "39", the lottery value "655" is assigned to the winning number "40", and the lottery value "0" is assigned to the winning numbers "41" to "63". Is assigned.

In the RT1 game state, the lottery value "33" is assigned to the winning number "39", the lottery value "1490" is assigned to the winning numbers "41" to "46", and the winning numbers "40" and "47" to "47" to " A lottery value "0" is assigned to "63". In the RT2 game state, the lottery value "17" is assigned to the winning number "39", the lottery value "64" is assigned to the winning number "40", and the lottery value "4991" is assigned to the winning numbers "47" to "52". Is assigned, the lottery value "1960" is assigned to the winning numbers "53" to "58", and the lottery value "0" is assigned to the winning numbers "41" to "46" and "59" to "63". There is. In the RT3 game state, the winning number "39" is assigned the lottery value "2188", the winning numbers "59" to "61" are assigned the lottery value "13168", and the winning number "62" is assigned the lottery value "63". Is assigned, the lottery value "32" is assigned to the winning number "63", and the lottery value "0" is assigned to the winning numbers "40" to "58". In the RT game state, the lottery value "12000" is assigned to the winning number "39", and the lottery value "0" is assigned to the winning numbers "40" to "63".

In the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers "64" to "75" are common to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. Further, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers "76" to "82" are common in the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, and differ only in the RT4 gaming state. Further, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers "83" and "84" are common to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. The winning number "83" is a winning number that is won only in the PBB gaming state and the RB gaming state during BB, and the winning number "84" is a winning number that is won only in the RT0 gaming state during BB.

(Internal lottery table for BB game status)
As shown in FIG. 17, the internal lottery table for the BB game state referred to in the BB game state is a lottery of each winning number in the PBB game state, the RT0 game state in the BB, the RT2 game state in the BB, and the RB game state in the BB. The value is specified. Here, since the configurations of the winning numbers "1" to "84" are the same as those of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the internal lottery table for the BB game state shown in FIG. 17, the winning numbers "2", "4" to "11", "13" to "20", in the RT0 game state in the BB and the RT2 game state in the BB, The same lottery values as the lottery values in the RT0 to RT3 game states are assigned to "22" to "29" and "31" to "38", which are the RT0 game state in BB and the RT2 in BB. It does not indicate that a bonus combination (excluding RB in BB) can be determined as an internal winning combination in the gaming state, and is determined in duplicate with a bonus combination (excluding RB in BB) in the RT0 to RT3 gaming states. For the replay combination or the small combination, it indicates that the lottery is performed with the same winning probability. Therefore, as in the RT4 game state and the RB game state during BB, all the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers "1" to "38" are set to "0", and the winning numbers "1" to "38" can be determined. The lottery value of the small winning combination that should have been added may be added and assigned in the winning numbers "76" to "82".

<Internal winning combination decision table for small roles / replays>
In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, data for identifying a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted is associated with the small winning combination / replay data pointer. ing.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, for convenience, the data of the internal winning combination for the small winning combination / replay data pointer is omitted, and the name (content) of the winning combination and the internal winning combination are omitted. Is associated with the name (remarks) of.

Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to associate a plurality of combinations of symbols (winning operation flags) for which winning is permitted with one data pointer. As a result, it is possible to allow a combination of a plurality of symbols (winning operation flag) to win a prize in one internal lottery process. These internal lottery methods are called "simultaneous winning" method and "duplicate winning" method.

In the present embodiment, a combination of one symbol (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted can be defined as an "internal winning combination", and winning is permitted for one data pointer. A combination of a plurality of symbols (winning operation flag) can be defined as an internal winning combination as one group, but in FIGS. 18 to 20, the latter is defined as an internal winning combination and will be described.

In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "0" is associated with "loss". That is, regarding the replay combination and the small combination, it is not permitted to display any combination of symbols related to the winning on the valid line.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "1" indicates "normal lip 1" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win. As (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8" are associated.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" indicates "normal lip 2" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win. As (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "BAR matching rips", and "BAR follow rips 1 to 12" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "3" indicates "left middle right RT2 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8" and "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "4" indicates the "left / right middle RT2 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2", and "BAR follow rip 1" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "5" indicates the "middle left / right RT2 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 4 to 6", and "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "6" indicates the "middle right / left RT2 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 4 to 6", "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2", and "BAR follow rip 1" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "7" indicates the "right / left middle RT2 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 4 to 6", "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2", and "BAR follow rip 2" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "8" indicates "right middle left RT2 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 4 to 6", "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2", and "BAR follow rip 3" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "9" indicates "left middle right RT2 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8" and "RT1 transition rips 1 to 3, 7 to 12" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "10" indicates the "left / right middle RT2 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 1 to 3, 7 to 12" and "BAR follow rip 1" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "11" indicates the "middle left / right RT2 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8" and "RT1 transition rips 1, 3, 7 to 16" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "12" indicates the "middle right / left RT2 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 1 to 3, 7 to 16" and "BAR follow rip 1" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "13" indicates the "right / left middle RT2 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 1 to 3, 7 to 16" and "BAR follow rip 2" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "14" indicates "right middle left RT2 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 1 to 3, 7 to 16" and "BAR follow rip 3" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "15" indicates "left middle right RT3 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 1 to 6", and "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "16" indicates the "left / right middle RT3 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 1 to 6", "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2", and "BAR follow rip 1" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "17" indicates the "middle left / right RT3 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "RT1 transition rips 1 to 3, 7 to 16" and "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "18" indicates the "middle right / left RT3 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "RT1 transition rips 1-3, 7 to 16", "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2," and "BAR follow rip 1" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "19" indicates the "right / left middle RT3 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning pattern is permitted. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "RT1 transition rips 1 to 12" and "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "20" indicates "right middle left RT3 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), "RT1 transition rips 1 to 12," "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2," and "BAR follow rip 1" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "21" indicates the "left RT3 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and the winning combination is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8" and "RT1 transition rips 1 to 3" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "22" indicates the "medium RT3 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and is a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 1 to 3", and "BAR follow rip 1" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "23" indicates the "right RT3 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and is a symbol that is allowed to win. As the combination (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT1 transition rips 1 to 3" and "BAR follow rip 2" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "24" indicates "BAR-matched fake clip" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win. As (winning operation flag), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2", and "BAR follow rips 1 to 12" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "25" indicates "BAR matching lip" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win. As (winning operation flags), "normal rips 1 to 8", "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2", "BAR matching rips" and "BAR follow rips 1 to 12" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "26" indicates "left middle right bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "upper bells 1 to 4" and "left follow small winning combination 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "27" indicates "left middle right bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "upper bells 1 to 4" and "left follow small winning combination 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "28" indicates "left and right middle bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 1 to 4" and "left follow small winning combination 3, 4, 7 to 10, 13, 14" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "29" indicates "left and right middle bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), "upper bells 1 to 4" and "left follow small winning combination 1, 2, 5, 6, 11, 12, 15, 16" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "30" indicates "middle left / right bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), "Cross-up bell", "Left follow small role 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14", "Medium follow small role 1, 2" and "Right follow small role 1 and 2" Combinations 2 and 4 ”are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "31" indicates "middle left / right bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), "cross-up bell", "left follow small winning combination 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16" and "medium follow small winning combination 3, 4" are associated with each other. There is.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "32" indicates "middle right / left bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), "Cross-up bell", "Left follow small role 1, 2, 5, 6", "Medium follow small role 5, 6, 9, 10" and "Right follow small role 2, 4" "Is associated with it.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "33" indicates "middle right / left bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), "cross-up bell", "left follow small winning combination 3, 4, 7, 8" and "medium follow small winning combination 7, 8, 10, 12" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "34" indicates "right, left, middle bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), "middle bell", "left follow small winning combination 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14" and "right following small winning combination 1, 2" are associated with each other. ..

In addition, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "35" indicates "right / left middle bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol is allowed to win. As a combination (winning operation flag), "middle bell", "left follow small winning combination 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16" and "right following small winning combination 3, 4" are associated with each other. ..

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "36" indicates "right middle left bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "middle bell" and "left follow small winning combination 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "37" indicates "right middle left bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to win a prize. As a combination of (winning operation flag), "middle bell" and "left follow small winning combination 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "38" indicates an "unquestioned bell" as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( "Cross-down bells 1 to 4" are associated with the winning operation flag).

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "39" indicates a "weak cherry" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( "Weak cherries 1 to 3" are associated with the winning operation flag).

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "40" indicates a "strong cherry" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( As the winning operation flag), "strong cherries 1 to 10" and "weak cherries 1 to 3" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "41" indicates "middle-tier cherry" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to win a prize ( As the winning operation flag), "middle cherries 1 and 2", "strong cherries 1 to 10" and "weak cherries 1 to 3" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "42" indicates "watermelon" as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to win (winning). "Watermelons 1 to 4" are associated with the operation flag).

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "43" indicates "chance 1" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win. As (winning operation flag), "special small winning combination 1" is associated.
Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "44" indicates "chance 2" as the internal winning combination, and is a combination of symbols that are allowed to win. As (winning operation flag), "special small winning combination 2" is associated.

Here, the "chance eye" is a combination of "missing" symbols for which no medals are paid out, but unlike the usual combination of "missing" symbols, a bonus combination may have been won. It can be defined as a combination of special symbols that can give a feeling of expectation. When the "special small winning combination 1" and the "special small winning combination 2" are determined as the internal winning combination in the general gaming state, the bonus combination is also won in duplicate with a probability of 104/256 (see FIG. 16). ) Therefore, in the present embodiment, when "special small winning combination 1" or "special small winning combination 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and "missing" described later occurs, a combination of special symbols is used. It is supposed to be displayed on the display window 4. In addition, even if "Special Small Role 1" and "Special Small Role 2" are won, the expectation that the bonus combination is duplicated is the same, so "Special Small Role 1" and "Special Small Role 2" It can be said that the combination of the symbols of is also a "chance eye".

Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "45" indicates "all small winning combinations" as the internal winning combination, and the symbols related to all the small winning combinations Winning combinations (see FIG. 15) are allowed.

<Internal winner decision table for bonus>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 19, data for identifying a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted is associated with the bonus data pointer.

Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 19, for convenience, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted from the bonus data pointer, and the name (content) of the winning combination and the name of the internal winning combination ( Remarks) is associated with.

In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "0" is associated with "loss". Further, the bonus data pointer "1" indicates "PBB" as an internal winning combination, and "PBB" is associated with a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag).

Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "2" indicates "BB1" as the internal winning combination, and as a combination of symbols allowed to win (winning operation flag), " BB1 ”is associated with it. Further, the bonus data pointer "3" indicates "BB2" as an internal winning combination, and "BB2" is associated with a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag). Further, the bonus data pointer "4" indicates "BB3" as an internal winning combination, and "BB3" is associated with a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag).
Further, the bonus data pointer "5" indicates "BB4" as an internal winning combination, and "BB4" is associated with a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag). Further, the bonus data pointer "6" indicates "JAC" as an internal winning combination, and "RB in BB" is associated with a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which winning is permitted. There is.

[Relationship between stop operation order and winning combination for internal winning combination]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the relationship between the stop operation order for the internal winning combination and the winning combination will be described.

In FIG. 20, as the stop operation order, "left middle right" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19L, the stop button 19C, and the stop button 19R, and "left and right middle" means the stop button 19L. It means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19R and the stop button 19C, and "middle left and right" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19C, the stop button 19L, and the stop button 19R. "Right and left" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of stop button 19C, stop button 19R, and stop button 19L, and "right and left middle" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of stop button 19R, stop button 19L, and stop button 19C. That is, "right middle left" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19R, the stop button 19C, and the stop button 19L.

<Overview of reel stop>
In the present embodiment, a plurality of combinations of symbols that are allowed to win a prize may be associated with one internal winning combination, and at what timing the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are operated. Depending on the (stop operation timing) and the order in which the operations are performed (stop operation order), the winning combination finally displayed may be controlled to change.

That is, regarding which symbol combination is finally displayed on the effective line (in other words, as basic information when the main CPU 93 executes reel stop control), the following It is determined based on the three elements of.

The first element is the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "miss" (the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "0"), the combination of symbols related to any of the replay winning combinations or the combination of symbols related to the small winning combination Will not eventually appear on the valid line.

The second element is the player's stop operation timing (in other words, the position of the symbol when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols, even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process, the winning is permitted. When the symbols constituting the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of four symbols, the combination of symbols permitted to win may not be displayed depending on the timing of the stop operation of the player. This is so-called "missing", and in FIG. 20, the notation "or loss" means that there is this "missing". Therefore, in the figure, when it is not described as "or lost", it means that at least one of the combinations of the symbols of the indicated winning combinations is displayed and there is no "missing". ..

The third element is the player's stop operation order. For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "normal lip 1" (the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "1"), the stop operation timing is set regardless of the stop operation order. Regardless of this, as shown in FIG. 20, control is performed so that the combination of symbols related to any of the replay combinations of "normal rips 1 to 8" is displayed on the effective line.

However, for example, when the result of the internal lottery process is "left middle right bell 1" (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is "26"), the stop operation order is "left middle right". Is controlled so that the combination of any of the symbols of "upper bells 1 to 4" is preferentially displayed on the valid line regardless of the stop operation timing, while the stop operation order is another stop operation. In the case of the order, the control is performed so that the combination of any of the symbols of "left follower 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14" is preferentially displayed on the effective line. Will be.
Then, when the stop operation timing is a timing at which the symbols constituting the combination of any of the symbols of "left follow combination 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14" can be displayed on the effective line. As long as, any combination of symbols of "left follower 1,2,5,6,9,10,13,14" is displayed on the valid line, and the stop operation timing is "left follower 1,2,5". , 6, 9, 10, 13, 14 ”If the timing is not such that the symbols that make up the combination of symbols can be displayed on the effective line,“ RT1 ”which is a part of the combination of“ lost ”designs. The combination of any of the symbols of "Transition symbols 1 to 8" is to be displayed on the effective line.

Here, the internal winning combination "left middle right RT2 transition lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "3") is set to the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Regardless, one of the "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2" wins, and the state shifts to the RT2 gaming state, which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state). Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left middle right RT2 transition lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "3"), the stop operation order "left middle right" is the most advantageous stop for the player. It becomes the operation procedure.

Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "left / right middle RT2 transition lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "4"), the stop operation order "left / right middle" is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. When the internal winning combination is "Middle / Left / Right RT2 Transition Lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "5"), the stop operation order "Middle / Left / Right" is the most advantageous stop for the player. When the internal winning combination is "Middle Right Left RT2 Transition Lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "6"), the stop operation order "Middle Right Left" is the most advantageous for the player. If the internal winning combination is "Right / Left Middle RT2 Transition Lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "7"), the stop operation order "Right / Left Middle" is the most advantageous for the player. If the internal winning combination is "Right middle left RT2 transition lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "8"), the stop operation order "right middle left" is the player. This is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the user.

In addition, the internal winning combination "left middle right RT2 maintenance lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "9") is not related to the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Instead, one of "normal rips 1 to 8" wins, and the RT2 gaming state, which is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state), is maintained. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left middle right RT2 maintenance lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "9"), the stop operation order "left middle right" is the most advantageous stop for the player. It becomes the operation procedure.

Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "Left / Right Middle RT2 Maintenance Lip" (the value of the data pointer for small win / replay is "10"), the stop operation order "Left / Right Middle" is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. When the internal winning combination is "Middle / Left / Right RT2 Maintenance Lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "11"), the stop operation order "Middle / Left / Right" is the most advantageous stop for the player. When the internal winning combination is "middle right / left RT2 maintenance lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "12"), the stop operation order "middle right / left" is the most advantageous for the player. It is a stop operation procedure, and when the internal winning combination is "Right / Left middle RT2 maintenance lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "13"), the stop operation order "Right / Left middle" is the most advantageous for the player. If the internal winning combination is "Right middle left RT2 maintenance lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "14"), the stop operation order "right middle left" is the player. This is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the user.

In addition, the internal winning combination "left middle right RT3 transition lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "15") is not related to the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Instead, one of the "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2" wins, and the system shifts to the RT3 gaming state, which is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state). The RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which an ART game described later is performed. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left middle right RT3 transition lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "15"), the stop operation order "left middle right" is the most advantageous stop for the player. It becomes the operation procedure.

Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "Left / Right Middle RT3 Transition Lip" (the value of the data pointer for small win / replay is "16"), the stop operation order "Left / Right Middle" is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. When the internal winning combination is "Middle / Left / Right RT3 Transition Lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "17"), the stop operation order "Middle / Left / Right" is the most advantageous stop for the player. When the internal winning combination is "Middle Right Left RT3 Transition Lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "18"), the stop operation order "Middle Right Left" is the most advantageous for the player. When the internal winning combination is "Right / Left Middle RT3 Transition Lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "19"), the stop operation order "Right / Left Middle" is the most advantageous for the player. If the internal winning combination is "Right middle left RT3 transition lip" (small role / replay data pointer value is "20"), the stop operation order "right middle left" is the player. This is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the user.

In addition, for the internal winning combination "Left RT3 maintenance lip" (small combination / replay data pointer value is "21"), the stop operation order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" (that is, "left first stop". Only in the case of "), any one of" normal rips 1 to 8 "wins a prize regardless of the stop operation timing, and the RT3 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) is maintained. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left RT3 maintenance lip" (the value of the data pointer for small combination / replay is "21"), the stop operation order "left first stop" is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. It becomes the procedure of.

Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "Medium RT3 maintenance lip" (the value of the data pointer for small combination / replay is "22"), the stop operation order is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left" (that is, "middle"). "1st stop") is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player, and when the internal winning combination is "Right RT3 maintenance lip" (small combination / replay data pointer value is "23"), the stop operation The order "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" (that is, "right first stop") is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In addition, the internal winning combination "left middle right bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "26") and "left middle right bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "27") When paying attention to the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), all of them can be collectively referred to as "left middle right bell" because they can give similar benefits. Here, if the result of the internal lottery process is "left middle right bell", nine medals will be paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Is done. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left middle right bell", the stop operation order "left middle right" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In addition, the internal winning combination "Left and Right Middle Bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "28") and "Left Middle Right Bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "29") Focusing on the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), they can be collectively referred to as "left and right middle bells" because they are common in that similar benefits can be given. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is "left and right middle bell", nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "left and right middle". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is the "left and right middle bell", the stop operation order "left and right middle" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In addition, the internal winning combination "Middle Left / Right Bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "30") and "Middle Left / Right Bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "31") Focusing on the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), they can be collectively referred to as "middle left and right bells" because they are common in that similar benefits can be given. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is "middle left / right bell", nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "middle left / right". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is the "middle left / right bell", the stop operation order "middle left / right" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In addition, the internal winning combination "Middle Right Left Bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "32") and "Middle Right Left Bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "33") Focusing on the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), it can be collectively referred to as "middle right / left bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be given. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is "middle right / left bell", nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "middle right / left". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is the "middle right / left bell", the stop operation order "middle right / left" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In addition, the internal winning combination "Right / Left Middle Bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "34") and "Right / Left Middle Bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "35") Focusing on the stop operation sequence (see FIG. 20), it can be collectively referred to as "right, left, middle bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be given. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is "right / left middle bell", nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "right / left middle". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is the "right / left middle bell", the stop operation order "right / left middle" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In addition, the internal winning combination "Right middle left bell 1" (small role / replay data pointer value is "36") and "Right middle left bell 2" (small role / replay data pointer value is "37") When paying attention to the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), all of them can be collectively referred to as "right middle left bell" because they can give similar benefits. Here, if the result of the internal lottery process is "right middle left bell", nine medals will be paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "right middle left". Is done. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "right middle left bell", the stop operation order "right middle left" is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player.

In this way, the internal winning combination in which the player's profit fluctuates based on the third factor described above is called a so-called "pushing order role", and when it is a replay role, it is called a "pushing order replay". In the case of a small role, it may be called a "pushing order small role".

In the present embodiment, when the "pushing order combination" is determined as the internal winning combination in the ART game, the stop operation order, which is an advantageous stop operation procedure for the player, is notified.

<Reel stop control>
The main CPU 93 executes the following processing in order to realize the above-mentioned reel stop control.

First, the main CPU 93 determines the internal winning combination in the internal lottery process (see S14 in FIG. 63) described later, and when the information regarding the internal winning combination is stored in the main RAM 95, the reel stop initial setting process described later (FIG. In (see S16 of 63), various stop control information stored in the main ROM 94 is read out and stored in the main RAM 95 based on the internal winning combination.

Here, exemplifying the information stored as various stop control information, in relation to the second element described above, at which symbol position when the stop button is operated on each reel, at which symbol position is stopped ( In relation to the information that directly or indirectly defines the number of sliding pieces) and the third element described above, when the stop button is operated in which stop operation order, which combination of symbols is preferentially displayed. Information that directly or indirectly defines the information can be mentioned.

Next, in the reel stop control process (see S22 in FIG. 63) described later, the main CPU 93 stops each reel based on various stop control information stored in the main RAM 95. In particular, when the internal winning combination is the "pushing order combination", appropriate stop control information is selected from the stored stop control information according to the stop operation order, or 1 stop operation is performed. After that, stop control information is generated (changed) and stop control is performed.

Depending on the stop operation timing and the stop operation order, different stop controls may be executed even for the same internal winning combination, but the stop control is uniquely determined in advance and is the same. The same stop control is executed as long as the internal winning combination and the same stop operation timing and stop operation order are used.

[Configuration of storage area allocated to main RAM]
Next, the configurations of various storage areas allocated to the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storage area shown in FIG. 21 is composed of 16 storage areas of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 16. The internal winning combination storage area is configured to be able to store data (bits) corresponding to the combination of each symbol specified in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, and as a result of the internal lottery process, a prize is won. "1" is set in the data (bits) corresponding to the combination of the allowed symbols, and "0" is set in the data (bits) corresponding to the combination of the symbols not allowed to win. Strictly speaking, "RT1 transition symbols 1 to 8" are not internal winning combinations, but are combinations of symbols displayed due to missing push order small combinations, so even if they are not stored in the internal winning combination storage area. Good. In this case, it may be configured by 15 storage areas of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 15.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 22 is composed of 16 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 16. The display combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area described above, and among the combinations of symbols that are allowed to win as a result of the internal lottery process, the symbols that can be displayed on the valid line. "1" is set in the data (bits) corresponding to the combination, and "0" is set in the data (bits) corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed.
Further, in the display combination storage area, each time each reel of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, the data (bits) is updated based on the data (bits) stored in the symbol code storage area described later. , Even after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the combination of symbols in which "1" is set will be the winning combination. That is, the display combination storage area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify the winning combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 23 is composed of 16 storage areas of symbol code storage areas 1 to 16. The symbol code storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area described above, and is valid among the combinations of the symbols specified in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 13 to 15. "1" is set for the data (bits) according to the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the line, and "0" is set for the data (bits) according to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. Set. Further, the data (bits) of the symbol code storage area is updated every time each reel of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped.

<Carryover storage area>
The carry-over combination storage area shown in FIG. 24 stores data related to the carry-over combination. For example, when a bonus combination (including RB in BB) is internally won, bit 0 of the carry-over combination storage area corresponding to the internally won bonus combination is set to "1", and the bonus combination is won and the BB game state. When shifting to (in the case of RB during BB, the RB game state during BB), the corresponding bit is reset to "0".

<Game status flag storage area>
The game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 25 stores data related to each game state of the BB game state and the RT game state. For example, when the PBB game state is entered, bit 0 of the game state flag storage area is set to "1".

Further, for example, when the RT game state becomes the RT1 game state, the bit 4 of the game state flag storage area is set to "1". When the bits 0 to 7 of the game state flag storage area are all "0", the game state is the RT0 game state.

<Operation stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 26 stores the operation states of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R. Bit 0 corresponds to the stop button 19L, and when the stop button 19L is operated, "1" is stored in bit 0.

Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the stop button 19C, and when the stop button 19C is operated, "1" is stored in bit 1. Further, the bit 2 corresponds to the stop button 19R, and when the stop button 19R is operated, "1" is stored in the bit 2.

Bit 4 corresponds to the stop button 19L, and when the stop button 19L is valid, "1" is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the stop button 19C, and when the stop button 19C is valid, "1" is stored in bit 5. Further, the bit 6 corresponds to the stop button 19R, and when the stop button 19R is valid, "1" is stored in the bit 6.

In the present embodiment, the effective stop button refers to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R corresponding to the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of detecting the stop operation by the main CPU 93.

<Press order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 27 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order (that is, pressing order) of the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R. Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order "left → middle → right", and when the pressing order is "left → middle → right", "1" is stored in bit 0, and the other bits are set to "0". It will be reset.

Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the pressing order of "left → right → middle", bit 2 corresponds to the pressing order of "middle → left → right", and bit 3 corresponds to the pressing order of "middle → right → left". The pressing order of bit 4 corresponds to "right-> left-> middle", and the pressing order of bit 5 corresponds to "right-> middle-> left".

[Structure of various lottery tables used for production, etc.]
Next, the configurations of various lottery tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 61.

<PBB medium addition ART game number lottery table>
The PBB middle-added ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 28 is referred to in the start command reception processing described later in the description of FIG. 80, and is added in the PBB game state (“PBB” in FIG. 62). Used to determine the number.

As shown in FIG. 28, the lottery value is assigned to the number of additional ART games in the PBB lottery table so that the number of additional ART games of any of 5 to 300 additional ART games is determined based on the internal winning combination. Has been done. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 28 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set values.

That is, in the PBB game state, the number of additional ART games is determined for each unit game based on the determined type of the internal winning combination, and the number of ART games in the ART game that shifts after the end of the PBB game state is added.

<Character lottery table during battle CZ>
The character lottery table during the battle CZ shown in FIG. 29 is referred to in the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command described later in the description of FIG. 88, and is played against the enemy character when the battle effect is executed during the “battle CZ”. It is used to determine the type of ally character. Here, "CZ" is an abbreviation for "chance zone", and means that there is a high degree of expectation for shifting to ART games, which is an advantageous state for players. The flow of the game related to "Battle CZ" will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the character lottery table during battle CZ, lottery values are assigned so that any character of ally character A, ally character B, or ally character C is determined based on the set value. There is. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 29 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, a different lottery value may be assigned to each set value.

In the battle CZ character lottery table shown in FIG. 29, for example, in the case of the set value 1 to 5, the ally character C is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, whereas in the case of the set value 6, 6554 The ally character C is determined with a probability of / 32768. Therefore, when the ally character C is determined many times, it is possible to recognize that the setting value 6 is likely to be set. The set value is a value indicating that the higher the value, the higher the degree of advantage for the player (higher ball output rate). In the present embodiment, for example, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the bonus combination will be determined as the internal winning combination, or the higher the set value, the higher the probability of shifting to the ART game. It is assumed that it has been done.

<HP subtraction success / failure lottery table>
The HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 30 is referred to in the battle CZ processing described later in the description of FIG. 84, and in the “battle CZ”, the character type (any of ally characters A to C) and the internal winning combination. Based on the above, it is used to determine whether or not the ally character attacks the enemy character. Here, "HP" is an abbreviation for "hit point". In addition, as the effect of the ally character attacking the enemy character is performed, the "HP" of the enemy character is subtracted, and when the "HP" of the enemy character becomes "0" or less, the game shifts to the ART game. It becomes. That is, in FIGS. 30 and 31 to 37 described later, “HP” is a specific numerical value for determining whether or not to grant the privilege of shifting to the ART game, which is an advantageous state for the player.

As shown in FIG. 30, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table is either non-winning (that is, "HP" is not subtracted) or not based on the internal winning combination for each character type (any of ally characters A to C). Lottery values are assigned so that one of the winners (ie, "HP" is subtracted) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 30 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set values.

<HP subtraction value lottery table>
The HP subtraction value lottery table for character A shown in FIG. 31, the HP subtraction value lottery table for character B shown in FIG. 32, and the HP subtraction value lottery table for character C shown in FIG. 33 are battle CZs described later in the description of FIG. It is referred to in the intermediate processing, and in "Battle CZ", the ally character attacks the enemy character based on the character type (any of the ally characters A to C) and the internal winning combination. When it is determined, it is used to determine the subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from "HP" accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the HP subtraction value lottery table has an HP subtraction of any of the HP subtraction values 5 to 60P based on the internal winning combination for each character type (any of the ally characters A to C). Lottery values are assigned so that the values are determined. The lottery value assigned in FIGS. 31 to 33 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, the lottery value assigned in one or more specific combinations (for example, "weak cherry" or "watermelon") may be different for each character type (any of ally characters A to C).

<HP subtraction success / failure lottery table for consecutive rips>
The rip continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 34 is referred to in the battle CZ processing described later in the description of FIG. 84, and in the “battle CZ”, the character type (any of ally characters A to C) and It is used to determine whether or not a friendly character attacks an enemy character based on the number of consecutive replays. Here, "rip-ren" is synonymous with the number of consecutive replays, and indicates the number of times the replay combination is continuously determined as the internal winning combination. Since the replay combination is a winning combination that wins regardless of the player's stop operation timing, the "rip-ream" and the number of consecutive replays can be said to be the number of consecutive winnings of the replay combination.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the rip continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table, non-winning (that is, "HP" is not subtracted) for each character type (any of ally characters A to C) based on the number of consecutive replays. ) Or the winning (ie, "HP" is subtracted) is assigned the lottery value. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 34 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set values.

<HP subtraction value lottery table for consecutive rips>
The HP subtraction value lottery table for the rip continuous character A shown in FIG. 35, the HP subtraction value lottery table for the rip continuous character B shown in FIG. 36, and the HP subtraction value lottery table for the rip continuous character C shown in FIG. 37 are In the description of FIG. 84, it is referred to in the process during battle CZ described later, and in "Battle CZ", the ally character becomes an enemy character based on the character type (any of ally characters A to C) and the number of continuous replays. It is used to determine the subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from "HP" when it is decided to perform an effect of attacking the opponent.

As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the HP subtraction value lottery table for continuous rips has any of HP subtraction values 5 to 60P based on the number of consecutive replays for each character type (any of ally characters A to C). The lottery value is assigned so that the HP subtraction value of is determined. The lottery values assigned in FIGS. 35 to 37 and the elements used in the lottery are shown as examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, the lottery value assigned in a specific number of consecutive replays (for example, "other") may be different for each character type (any of ally characters A to C).

<Additional number of ART games at the time of winning ART during battle CZ Success / failure lottery table>
The success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games at the time of winning ART in battle CZ shown in FIG. 38 is referred to in the process during battle CZ described later in the description of FIG. 84, and it is decided to shift to the ART game during "battle CZ". In that case (that is, when "HP" becomes "0" or less), it is used to determine whether or not to add the number of ART games based on the number of lottery possible times and the internal winning combination. Here, the "lottery possible number of times" indicates the lottery period in which the lottery for shifting to the ART game (that is, the subtraction lottery of "HP") is performed during the "battle CZ".

The number of times the lottery can be drawn is internally the push order small win (small win / replay data pointer value is "26" to "37") or the RB small / medium win (small win / replay data pointer value is "45"). When the winning combination is decided, "1" is added, and when the number of lottery possible times becomes "5" or more, in the subsequent "Battle CZ", the lottery for shifting to the ART game (that is, "HP") Subtraction lottery) is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, after shifting to "Battle CZ", the push order small role (small role / replay data pointer value is "26" to "37") or RB small / medium small role (small role / small role / The lottery period is the period until the value of the data pointer for replay is "45") and is determined as the internal winner 5 times, and the lottery for shifting to the ART game (that is, the subtraction lottery of "HP"). Is configured to be done.

In addition, the push order small combination (small combination / replay data pointer values "26" to "37") is a bell (that is, regardless of the player's stop operation timing) when the stop operation order is correct. , Upper bells 1 to 4, cross-up bells, or middle bells), and RB small and medium-sized wins (small win / replay data pointer value is "45") are player stop operations. The bell (that is, either the cross-down bells 1 to 4, the upper bells 1 to 4, the cross-up bell, or the middle bell) wins regardless of the timing. Therefore, the number of times the lottery is possible can be said to be the number of times a specific combination (bell) is won in the BB game state.

As shown in FIG. 38, the success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games at the time of winning the ART during the battle CZ is not won (that is, the number of ART games is not added) or won based on the internal winning combination for each number of times the lottery is possible. The lottery value is assigned so that one of (that is, the number of ART games is added) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 38 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto.
For example, different lottery values may be further assigned based on the number of games played during "Battle CZ". Specifically, when the number of times the lottery is possible is "4 times" and the number of games is less than "10 times", the lottery is performed according to the lottery value as shown in FIG. 38, and the number of games is "10 times". In the above case, the lottery value may be assigned so that the winning (that is, the number of ART games is added) is determined with a higher probability than that shown in FIG. 38.

<Additional ART game number lottery table when winning ART during battle CZ>
The lottery table for the number of additional ART games at the time of winning ART during battle CZ shown in FIG. 39 is referred to in the process during battle CZ described later in the description of FIG. 84, and it is decided to shift to the ART game during "battle CZ". In the case (that is, when "HP" is "0" or less) and it is decided that the number of ART games will be added, the number of additional ART games (multiple) based on the number of lottery possible times. Is used to determine.

As shown in FIG. 39, the number of additional ART games at the time of winning the ART during the battle CZ The lottery table is based on the number of times the lottery is possible, and the number of additional ART games (multiple) of 2 to 5 times the number of additional ART games (multiple). The lottery value is assigned so that is determined. The number of additional ART games (multiple) is used to determine how many times the initial value "50" of the number of ART games is to be multiplied. For example, when "double" is determined as the number of additional ART games (multiple), the initial value of the number of ART games is "100 (50 x 2)", and the number of additional ART games (multiple) is "triple". When "" is determined, the initial value of the number of ART games is "150 (50 x 3)", and when "4 times" is determined as the number of additional ART games (multiple), the number of ART games When the initial value is "200 (50 x 4)" and "5 times" is determined as the number of additional ART games (multiples), the initial value of the number of ART games is "250 (50 x 5)". .. However, the lottery value assigned in FIG. 39 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, the number of ART games to be added directly may be determined based on the number of lottery possible times, as in the battle CZ number of additional ART games to be added lottery table described later in the description of FIG. 41.

<Additional success / failure lottery table for the number of ART games during battle CZ>
The success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the battle CZ shown in FIG. 40 is referred to in the battle CZ processing described later in the description of FIG. 84, and it is decided to shift to the ART game in the “battle CZ” (that is,). , After "HP" becomes "0" or less), until the end of "Battle CZ", it is used to decide whether or not to add the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 40, the success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the battle CZ is either non-winning (that is, the number of ART games is not added) or winning (that is, the number of ART games is added) based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value is assigned so that one of the above is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 40 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be further assigned based on the number of games played during "Battle CZ". Specifically, if the number of games is less than "20 times", the lottery is performed according to the lottery value as shown in FIG. 40, and if the number of games is "20 times" or more, it is higher than that shown in FIG. 40. The lottery value may be assigned so that the winning (that is, the number of ART games is added) is determined with a probability.

<Lottery table for the number of ART games added during battle CZ>
The lottery table for the number of additional ART games in battle CZ shown in FIG. 41 is referred to in the process during battle CZ described later in the description of FIG. 84, and when it is decided to shift to the ART game during "battle CZ" (that is,). , When "HP" is "0" or less) and it is decided that the number of ART games will be added, it is used to determine the number of additional ART games based on the internal winning combination. Be done.

As shown in FIG. 41, the lottery table for the number of additional ART games in the battle CZ has a lottery value so that the number of additional ART games of any of 5 to 300 additional ART games is determined based on the internal winning combination. Assigned. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 41 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, as in the lottery table for the number of additional ART games at the time of winning the ART during the battle CZ shown in FIG. 39, the number of additional ART games (multiples) may be determined based on the internal winning combination.

<Card acquisition success / failure lottery table>
The card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 42 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and is used in the “normal BB” and in the “item CZ” described later based on the internal winning combination. It is used to decide whether or not to acquire the item. Here, in the present embodiment, an example of the item will be described using a “card”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and includes all aspects in which the player can recognize a plurality of items. For example, it may indicate an ornament (equipment) of a friendly character, or it may indicate a jewel. In the "item CZ" described later, a lottery is performed over the number of games according to the number of items acquired in the "normal BB" to decide whether or not to shift to the ART game, and if this lottery is won, the ART game is entered. It will be migrated. That is, in FIG. 42 and FIGS. 42 to 49 described later, the "card" is a lottery right for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to an ART game, which is an advantageous state for the player. The flow of the game related to "normal BB" will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 42, the card acquisition success / failure lottery table is either non-winning (ie, not winning a "card") or winning (ie, winning a "card") based on the internal winning combination. Lottery values are assigned to be determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 42 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set values.

<Card type lottery table>
The card type lottery table shown in FIG. 43 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and is used in the “normal BB” to determine the card type based on the internal winning combination. In the present embodiment, seven types of cards, "LV1 card" to "LV7 card", are provided, and when acquired, the display content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the "LV7 card" described later will be described. It is configured so that the degree of expectation of winning the lottery as to whether or not to shift to the ART game during "Item CZ" is different. That is, the "LV (level)" indicates the degree of expectation of whether or not to shift to the ART game, which is an advantageous state for the player.

The "LV1 card" has the lowest expectation of whether or not to shift to an ART game, and if it is acquired, for example, a card with one star is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. .. The highest degree of expectation is whether or not the "LV7 card" will shift to the ART game, and if it is acquired, for example, a card on which seven stars are described is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. That is, the higher the "LV (level)", the higher the expectation of whether or not to shift to the ART game, and the display is made according to the expectation.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the card type lottery table, lottery values are assigned so that any one of "LV1 card" to "LV7 card" is determined based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 43 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, the lottery values assigned may be different based on the number of times the lottery is possible.

<Lottery table for success or failure of card acquisition at consecutive times>
The rip continuous card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 44 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and in the “normal BB”, in the “item CZ” described later based on the number of consecutive replays. It is used to decide whether or not to acquire the item used for. Since the "rip series" and the number of continuous replays are the same as those in FIG. 34, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 44, the rip consecutive card acquisition success / failure lottery table is either non-winning (that is, not acquiring "cards") or winning (that is, acquiring "cards") based on the number of consecutive replays. Lottery values are assigned so that either one is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 44 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set values.

<Lottery table by card type for consecutive rips>
The rip continuous card type lottery table shown in FIG. 45 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and is used to determine the card type in the “normal BB” based on the number of consecutive replays. Be done.

As shown in FIG. 45, the lottery value is assigned to the rip continuous card type lottery table so that any one of the "LV1 card" to "LV7 card" is determined based on the number of consecutive replays. .. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 45 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, the lottery values assigned may be different based on the number of times the lottery is possible.

<Normal BB number of ART games added success / failure lottery table>
The success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the normal BB shown in FIG. 46 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and it is decided to shift to the ART game in the “normal BB” (that is,). , As will be described later, after the "number of cards" is "8" or more), until the end of "normal BB", in order to decide whether or not to add the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination. Used for.

As shown in FIG. 46, the success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the normal BB is either non-winning (that is, the number of ART games is not added) or winning (that is, the number of ART games is added) based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value is assigned so that one of the above is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 46 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, further, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of games played in "normal BB". Specifically, if the number of games is less than "20 times", the lottery is performed according to the lottery value as shown in FIG. 46, and if the number of games is "20 times" or more, it is higher than that shown in FIG. The lottery value may be assigned so that the winning (that is, the number of ART games is added) is determined with a probability.

<Normal BB middle addition ART game number lottery table>
The drawing table for the number of additional ART games in the normal BB shown in FIG. 47 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and when it is decided to shift to the ART game in the “normal BB” (that is,). , As will be described later, when the "number of cards" is "8" or more) and it is decided that the number of ART games will be added, the number of additional ART games will be added based on the internal winning combination. Is used to determine.

As shown in FIG. 47, the lottery table for the number of additional ART games in the normal BB has a lottery value so that the number of additional ART games of any of 5 to 300 additional ART games is determined based on the internal winning combination. Assigned. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 47 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto.
For example, as in the lottery table for the number of additional ART games at the time of winning the ART during the battle CZ shown in FIG. 39, the number of additional ART games (multiples) may be determined based on the internal winning combination.

<Lottery table for the number of ART games added when there are surplus cards>
The card surplus time addition ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to in the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85, and when it is decided to shift to the ART game in the “normal BB” (that is,). , As will be described later, when the "number of cards" is "8" or more), the cards that were not used in the "item CZ" described later (that is, the surplus cards of "8" or more in this case) It is used to determine the number of additional ART games by drawing lots for the number of surplus cards based on the card type of.

Further, the card surplus time addition ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to in the item CZ middle processing described later in the description of FIG. 86, and when it is decided to shift to the ART game in the “item CZ”. (That is, as will be described later, when the ART lottery executed based on the card type and the internal winning combination is won), the card not used in the "item CZ" (for example, in the "normal BB") If you have acquired 5 cards and won the ART lottery based on the 1st card in "Item CZ", the remaining cards will be based on the card type of "4" remaining cards). It is used to determine the number of additional ART games by drawing lots for the number of cards.

As shown in FIG. 48, the lottery value is assigned to the number of additional ART games when there are surplus cards so that the number of additional ART games of any of 5 to 300 additional ART games is determined based on the card type. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, in the lottery table for the number of additional ART games when there are surplus cards, the higher the expectation level (“LV (level)”) of the surplus cards, the larger the number of additional ART games to be determined. A value has been assigned. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 48 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned according to the internal winning combination, the number of games, the number of times the lottery is possible, and the like in the unit game in which the surplus card is generated.

<ART lottery table in item CZ>
The ART lottery table in item CZ shown in FIG. 49 is referred to in the item CZ processing described later in the description of FIG. 86, and is based on the card type of the card acquired in "normal BB" in "item CZ". It is used to decide whether or not to shift to the ART game. As described above, the ART lottery table in this item CZ is configured so that the higher the "LV (level)" of the card, the higher the probability of shifting to the ART game. The flow of the game related to "Item CZ" will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 49, the ART lottery table in the item CZ is not won (that is, does not shift to the ART game) or won based on the internal winning combination for each card type (any of LV1 to LV7 cards). The lottery value is assigned so that one of (that is, the transition to the ART game) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 49 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of item CZ games (that is, the number of cards) described later.

Further, the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49 has "weak cherry" (corresponding to the winning number "77" in the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 16) and "strong cherry" as the types of internal winning combinations. (Corresponding to the winning number "78" in the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 16), "Watermelon" (corresponding to the winning number "80" in the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 16), "Chance "Eye 1" and "Chance Eye 2" (corresponding to the winning numbers "81" and "82" in the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 16), "BAR matching lip" and "bonus duplication" (in FIG. 16) Winning numbers "63" and "2", "4" to "11", "13" to "20", "22" to "29", "31" to "38" in the internal lottery table for general gaming states shown. (Corresponding to), and "Other" (corresponding to other winning numbers and "missing" in the internal lottery table for general gaming state shown in FIG. 16) are stipulated.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the winning probability of the replay combination in the BB game state is inherited to the general game state after the end of the BB game state. That is, the "item CZ" is the RT0 gaming state (and the RT0 gaming state, or the RT1 gaming state shifted from the RT2 gaming state), which is the replay low probability state (low RT gaming state), or the replay high probability state (high). It may be executed in both RT2 gaming states, which are RT gaming states). However, if the "JAC" is internally elected during the "normal BB", that fact is notified. Therefore, if the player performs the stop operation at the stop operation timing that does not allow the "JAC" to win, basically. Will be executed in the RT2 gaming state. However, when the player performs the stop operation at the stop operation timing for winning the "JAC", the "item CZ" is executed in the RT0 game state or the RT1 game state.

Further, in the "item CZ" executed in the RT2 game state which is the replay high probability state (high RT game state), the stop operation for not shifting to the RT1 game state which is the replay low probability state (low RT game state). Since the procedure of is notified, if the player performs the stop operation according to the notified stop operation procedure, basically, the RT2 game state is maintained during the "item CZ". However, if the player does not perform the stop operation according to the notified stop operation procedure, the RT2 game state may shift to the RT1 game state during the "item CZ".

Therefore, in the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49, the internal winning combination (for example, "RT2 maintenance lip") determined with high probability in the RT2 gaming state, which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state), The internal winning combination (for example, "loss") determined with high probability in the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state, which is the replay low probability state (low RT gaming state), is defined as the same type of internal winning combination, and ART. It is stipulated that the probability of shifting to a game is the lowest compared to other types of internal winners.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined lottery state (for example, in "item CZ") in which the lottery for whether or not to shift to the game state advantageous to the player (for example, ART game) is performed is replayed. It may shift to either a high probability state (for example, RT2 game state) or a replay low probability state (for example, RT0 game state or RT1 game state), but a common lottery table is used in all game states. (For example, the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49) can be used for lottery.

With such a configuration, the number of lottery tables used in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a game state (for example, ART game) advantageous to the player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the storage area (for example, the storage area of the ROM cartridge substrate 86) from being compressed. Further, even if the player intentionally shifts from the replay high probability state to the replay low probability state, the player will not be able to receive an advantageous lottery, so that the player is in an advantageous gaming state (for example,). , ART game) can be properly drawn.

<HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during ART>
The HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 50 is referred to in the additional BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 82, and in the “addition BB”, the enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D) and the inside. It is used to determine whether or not a friendly character attacks an enemy character based on the winning combination. In addition, as the ally character attacks the enemy character, the enemy character's "HP" is subtracted, and when the enemy character's "HP" becomes "0" or less, the number of ART games is added. It will shift to the special addition state. That is, in FIGS. 50 and 51 to 54, which will be described later, “HP” is a specific additional state (special additional state) for adding the number of games (the number of ART games) of the ART game, which is an advantageous state for the player. It is a specific number for deciding whether or not to grant the privilege of shifting to.

As shown in FIG. 50, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during ART is non-winning (that is, "HP" is not subtracted) based on the internal winning combination for each enemy type (any of enemy characters A to D). , Or the winning (ie, "HP" is subtracted) is determined by the lottery value. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 50 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set values.

<HP subtraction value lottery table during ART>
The HP subtraction value lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 51 is referred to in the additional BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 82, and in the “addition BB”, the enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D) and the inside. In order to determine the subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from "HP" when it is decided that the ally character attacks the enemy character based on the winning combination. Used.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the HP subtraction value lottery table during ART, lottery values are assigned so that any HP subtraction value of HP subtraction values 5 to 60P is determined based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 51 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned to at least a part of each enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D).

<HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during rip consecutive ART>
The HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during the rip continuous ART shown in FIG. 52 is referred to in the additional BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 82, and the enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D) in the “addition BB”. And, based on the number of consecutive replays, it is used to determine whether or not the ally character attacks the enemy character. Since the "rip series" and the number of continuous replays are the same as those in FIG. 34, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 52, the continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table for each enemy type (either enemy characters A to C or enemy character D) is non-winning (that is, “) based on the number of consecutive replays. Lottery values are assigned so that either "HP" is not subtracted) or winning (ie, "HP" is subtracted) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 52 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set values.

<HP subtraction value lottery table during rip continuous ART>
The HP subtraction value lottery table during ART for the rip continuous enemies A to C shown in FIG. 53 and the HP subtraction value lottery table during ART for the rip continuous enemies D shown in FIG. 54 are in the additional BB described later in the description of FIG. Refer to in the process, and in "Additional BB", it is decided that the ally character will attack the enemy character based on the enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to D) and the number of consecutive replays. If so, it is used to determine the subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from "HP" accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the HP subtraction value lottery table during continuous rip ART is based on the number of consecutive replays for each enemy type (either enemy characters A to C or enemy character D). The lottery value is assigned so that the HP subtraction value of any of the subtraction values 5 to 60P is determined. The lottery values assigned in FIGS. 53 and 54 and the elements used in the lottery are shown as examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, the lottery value assigned in a specific number of consecutive replays (for example, "other") may be different for each enemy type (any of the enemy characters A to C).

<Bell winning number lottery table for additional number of ART games>
The bell winning number lottery table for adding the number of ART games shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the item CZ processing described later in the description of FIG. 86, and when it is decided to shift to the ART game in the "item CZ". (That is, when the ART transition lottery based on the card type and the internal winning combination is won), it is used to determine the "bell winning number" for adding the number of ART games to the lottery. Here, the "bell winning number of times" indicates the number of times a bell (that is, any of cross-down bells 1 to 4, upper bells 1 to 4, cross-up bell, or middle bell) is won in an ART game. In FIGS. 55 to 57, the number of times the bell (that is, any of the cross-down bells 1 to 4, the upper bells 1 to 4, the cross-up bell, or the middle bell) is won is used instead of the "bell winning number". The "bell winning count" shown may be used.

Further, the lottery table for the number of winning bells for adding the number of ART games shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the process during the normal game described later in the description of FIG. 87, and it is decided to shift to the ART game during the "normal game". In this case (for example, when the winning combination "BAR Matching Lip" is won), it is used to determine the number of bell winnings for adding the number of ART games and drawing lots.

Further, the bell winning number lottery table for adding the number of ART games shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command described later in the description of FIG. 88, and the number of winning bells in the "ART game" is determined. When the number of bell winnings is reached, it is used to determine the number of bell winnings again.

Further, the bell winning number lottery table for adding the number of ART games shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the process at the time of receiving the bonus end command described later in the description of FIG. 89, and when the PBB game state ends, the "battle CZ" ends. When it is decided to shift to ART at the time, and when it is decided to shift to ART at the end of "normal BB", the number of bell prizes for drawing by adding the number of ART games is determined. Used to do.

As shown in FIG. 55, the lottery table for the number of bell winnings for adding the number of ART games is assigned a lottery value so that any one of the number of bell winnings 1 to 20 is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 55 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, a different lottery value may be assigned for each transition opportunity determined to shift to ART.

<Additional success / failure lottery table for the number of ART games when the number of bell prizes is reached>
The success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games when the number of bell winnings reached, which is shown in FIG. 56, is referred to in the process when the winning operation command is received, which will be described later in the description of FIG. It is used to determine whether or not to add the number of ART games when the number of winning bells is reached.

As shown in FIG. 56, the success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games when the number of bell winnings is reached is either non-winning (that is, the number of ART games is not added) or winning (that is, the number of ART games is added). The lottery value is assigned so that is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 56 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be further assigned based on the number of games played in the "ART game". Further, for example, as described above, different lottery values may be assigned for each transition opportunity determined to shift to ART.

<Additional ART game number lottery table when the number of bell prizes is reached>
The additional ART game number lottery table when the number of bell winnings is reached shown in FIG. 57 is referred to in the processing when the winning operation command is received, which will be described later in the description of FIG. 88, and the number of winnings of the bell in the "ART game" is determined. It is used to determine the number of additional ART games when the number of bell winnings is reached and the number of ART games is determined to be added.

As shown in FIG. 57, the lottery value is assigned to the number of additional ART games lottery table when the number of bell winnings is reached so that the number of additional ART games of any of 5 to 300 additional ART games is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 57 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, the number of additional ART games (multiple) that determines how many times the number of ART games to be added to the determined number of bell winnings may be determined. In this case, if "1 time" is determined as the number of bell prizes and "5 times" is determined as the number of additional ART games (multiples), the number of ART games for 5 games is added, but the bell prize is won. If "20 times" is determined as the number of times and "5 times" is determined as the number of additional ART games (multiples), the number of ART games for 100 games will be added, so more bell prizes will be awarded. Even when the number of times is determined, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player.

<Lottery table for transition to ART mode>
The ART mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to in the ART game processing described later in the description of FIG. 81, and during the ART game, the mode during the ART game (normal mode or preferential treatment) based on the internal winning combination. Mode) is used to determine. The "preferential mode" is a specific mode in which the probability that the additional lottery for the number of ART games in the special additional state will continue (or win) is higher than that in the "normal mode".

As shown in FIG. 58, the ART middle mode transition lottery table is used for each current mode (either normal mode or preferential mode), based on the internal winning combination, in the transition destination mode (normal mode or preferential mode). The lottery value is assigned so that one of) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 58 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, as in the normal middle mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59, internal winners other than bells (that is, either cross-down bells 1 to 4, upper bells 1 to 4, cross-up bells, or middle bells) Even if it is decided, the mode transition lottery may be performed.

<Normal medium mode transition lottery table>
The normal mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59 is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the description of FIG. 87, and during the normal game, the mode during the normal game (normal mode or battle) based on the internal winning combination. Mode) is used to determine. The "battle mode" is a specific mode for shifting the BB game state to the "battle CZ" when the BBs 1 to 4 are internally won during the normal game.

As shown in FIG. 59, the normal medium mode transition lottery table is set in the transition destination mode (normal mode or battle mode) for each current mode (either normal mode or battle mode) based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value is assigned so that (one of) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 59 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned according to the current number of ceiling games.

<Mode transition lottery table at the end of ART>
The ART end mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 60 is referred to in the ART game end check process described later in the description of FIG. 83, and at the end of the ART game, the first mode (normal mode or battle mode) during the normal game. Is used to determine.

As shown in FIG. 60, the lottery value is assigned to the mode transition lottery table at the end of ART so that the mode (normal mode or battle mode) of the transition destination is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 60 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the set values.

<Lottery table for the number of precursor games when BB is won>
The BB winning precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 61 is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the description of FIG. 87, and when the BBs 1 to 4 are internally won during the normal game, the internal lottery result is announced. It is used to determine the number of precursor games to be played. Although not shown, continuous production is performed so as to keep the player's expectation from the time when BBs 1 to 4 are internally elected until the result of the internal lottery is announced. That is, it can be said that the "precursor game number" indicates the number of games in which the continuous production is executed. Therefore, even if BBs 1 to 4 are not internally won, a specific internal winning combination (for example, normal lip 1, unquestioned bell, weak cherry, strong) that is determined as an internal winning combination overlapping with BB1 to 4 If any of cherry, chance 1, chance 2, middle cherry, and watermelon) is determined as the internal winner, the number of precursor games is determined, and continuous production is performed according to the determined number of precursor games. You may do it. In this case, in the final game of continuous production, it is announced that BB1 to BB4 have not been internally elected.

As shown in FIG. 61, the lottery value is assigned to the BB winning precursor game number lottery table so that the precursor game number of any of the precursor games 0 to 5 is determined based on the internal winning combination. There is. Here, when the number of precursor games is "0 games", the continuous production is not executed, and the internal lottery result is announced in the games in which BBs 1 to 4 are internally elected. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 60 and each element used in the lottery are shown as an example, and are not limited thereto. For example, different lottery values may be assigned according to the current number of ceiling games. Specifically, when BB1 to 4 are internally elected when the number of ceiling games is "496", the number of precursor games (for example, 4 games or 5 games) in which the number of ceiling games is "500" or more). May be assigned the lottery value so that is determined with a higher probability than shown in FIG. That is, if the bonus combination is internally won just before the number of ceiling games reaches the specified number of games (for example, "500"), it is easy to determine the number of precursor games in which the number of ceiling games exceeds the specified number of games. It may be that. With this configuration, even if the bonus role is internally won immediately before the activation of the ceiling function (in this embodiment, the confirmation of "Battle CZ"), the profit from the ceiling function is given to the player. Since it is possible to do so, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player's game.

[Flow of pachislot machine games]
Next, the flow of the game of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a schematic view showing the flow of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

First, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state in which the game is played by the player is an ART game, which is an advantageous game state for the player, and a normal game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the ART game. It is roughly divided into normal games.

<Normal game>
In the transition from normal games to ART games, "PBB" was won and won, the PBB game state was completed, the conditions for transition to ART games were met during "Battle CZ" (CZ success), and "Items". It will be held when the conditions for transition to the ART game are satisfied in "CZ" (CZ success) and the "BAR matching lip" is won. Further, although not shown in FIG. 62, the game shifts to the ART game even when the conditions for shifting to the ART game are satisfied in the “normal BB”. Further, as described above, the "PBB" and the "BAR matching lip" are definite roles that determine the transition to the ART game.

<PBB>
In the normal game, when the bonus role "PBB" is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition to the ART game is confirmed, the initial value (50) of the number of ART games is given, and the lottery of the number of ART sets is given. Is done. After that, when "PBB" wins a prize and shifts to the PBB game state, a lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed for each unit game until the PBB game state ends. Then, when the PBB game state ends, the ART game is started based on the number of ART games in which the result of the lottery is added to the initial value (50) of the number of ART games. Although not shown in FIG. 62, the same control is performed when "PBB" is determined as the internal winning combination in the ART game. That is, the number of ART games obtained by adding the result of the lottery to the initial value (50) of the number of ART games is given as the number of additional games.

<Battle CZ>
In a normal game, when any one of the bonus combinations "BB1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the "specific condition" is satisfied depending on whether or not the "battle mode lock flag" described later is on. The "battle mode lock flag" is a predetermined number of games in which the number of ceiling games (that is, the specified number of games played in a normal game without shifting to a game state advantageous to the player (ART game, BB game state)). It is turned on when (500 games) or more, or when any one of "BB1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination during the stay of "battle mode" in the normal game. When the "battle mode lock flag" is on, the BB game state (RT0 game state during BB, RT2 game state during BB, or RB game state during BB) is controlled to "battle CZ".

In the battle CZ, a battle effect is executed in which the ally character and the enemy character battle, and as described above, the subtraction lottery of the enemy character's "HP" is performed, and the enemy character is before the BB game state ends. When the "HP" of "HP" becomes "0" or less, the CZ is successful and the game shifts to the ART game after the end of the BB game state. On the other hand, if the BB game state ends before the "HP" of the enemy character becomes "0" or less, a CZ failure occurs, the initial value (0) of the number of ceiling games is set, and the game returns to the normal game.

<Normal BB>
In a normal game, when any of the bonus combinations "BB1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination and it is determined that a specific condition is not satisfied (that is, when the "battle mode lock flag" is off). ), The BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state during BB, RT2 gaming state during BB, or RB gaming state during BB) is controlled to "normal BB".

Normally, in BB, a card acquisition effect of whether or not a ally character acquires a card is executed, and as described above, a card acquisition lottery is performed. If the number of cards acquired before the end of the BB game state is "8" or more, the game shifts to the ART game after the end of the BB game state. On the other hand, if the BB game state ends before the number of cards reaches "8" or more, the item CZ shifts to the item CZ after the end of the BB game state. In addition, during normal BB (more specifically, RT0 game state during BB), "JAC" is drawn with high probability (see FIG. 17), and one card can always be obtained when "JAC" is won (see FIG. 17). See FIG. 42).
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the item CZ from being transferred to the item CZ when the number of cards is 0. Although the possibility is extremely small, if the BB game state ends with the number of cards being 0, the game may shift to the ART game after the end of the BB game state.

<Item CZ>
In normal BB, if the BB game state ends before the number of cards reaches "8" or more, the general game state (RT2 game state or RT0 game state) after the end of the BB game state is "Item CZ". Is controlled. Item CZ is normally performed for the number of cards acquired in BB (that is, the number of item CZ games), and ends when the number of cards reaches "0" (that is, the number of item CZ games is "0"). ..

In the item CZ, an effect according to the type of acquired card (for example, an effect with low expectation for "LV1 card" and an effect with high expectation for "LV7 card") is executed. As described above, the lottery for shifting to ART games is performed with the degree of expectation according to the type of card. If the lottery for transition to ART is won before all the acquired cards are used, the CZ will be successful, the number of ART games will be added according to the surplus cards, and the initial value of the number of ART games ( The ART game will be started based on the number of ART games in which the result of the lottery is added to 50). On the other hand, if all the cards acquired without winning the transition lottery to ART are used, CZ fails, the initial value (0) of the number of ceiling games is set, and the game returns to normal game.

<ART game>
When the game shifts to the ART game, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified until the number of ART games and the number of ART sets become "0". The player can increase the number of medals by performing the stop operation according to the notification. When the number of ART games and the ART set become "0", the mode in the normal game (normal mode or battle mode) is determined, the initial value (0) of the number of ceiling games is set, and the game returns to the normal game. ..

(Additional BB)
In the ART game, when any of the bonus combinations "BB1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the BB game state (RT0 game state in BB, RT2 game state in BB, or RB game state in BB) is changed. It is controlled by "additional BB".

In the additional BB, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is executed, and as described above, the subtraction lottery of the enemy character's "HP" is performed, and the enemy character's "HP" is subtracted before the game state ends. When "HP" becomes "0" or less, it shifts to the special addition state after the end of the BB game state. On the other hand, if the BB game state ends before the "HP" of the enemy character becomes "0" or less, the game returns to the ART game after the end of the BB game state.

(Special addition state)
In the additional BB, if the "HP" of the enemy character becomes "0" or less before the end of the BB game state, the general game state (RT0 game state to RT3 game state) after the end of the BB game state is ". It is controlled to "special addition state". In the special addition state, for example, as in the PBB game state, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is performed for each unit game until the special addition state ends. Further, in the special addition state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 4 games) is set as one set, and at the start or end of one set, a continuous lottery is performed as to whether or not to continue the next set, and the result of this continuous lottery. If is won, the lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed again during the next set, while if the result of this continuous lottery is not won, the special addition state ends and the game returns to the ART game.

In the present embodiment, the bonus combination internally won in the ART game is BB1 or BB3 (that is, the same color bonus), or BB2 or BB4 (that is, a different color bonus), but is internally won during the preferential mode. In that case, when it is decided to shift to the special addition state in the subsequent addition BB, the lottery in this special addition state is controlled to the preferential state of being "preferred". In this preferential state, for example, the probability of winning a continuous lottery (“continuation rate”) as to whether or not to continue the set in the special addition state is given preferential treatment (that is, the winning probability is increased). .. The mode of preferential treatment is not limited to this. For example, in the additional lottery for the number of ART games, a relatively large number of additional ART games may be easily determined, or when the number of continuous games per set is changed, the number of continuous games is relatively long. May be easier to determine.

Moreover, the aspect of the "continuation rate" is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of predetermined continuation rates (for example, 1%, 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 90%) at the time of transition of the special addition state (or when it is decided to shift). It may be decided how many sets the special addition state is to be continued according to the determined continuation rate. In this case, in the preferential state, if it is easy to determine a relatively high continuation rate among the plurality of continuation rates, the lottery in the special additional state can be given preferential treatment.

(Additional number of bells)
In the ART game, when the above-mentioned number of bell winnings reaches a predetermined number of times, a lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed. The number of ART games added by adding the number of bells is not immediately notified to the player (that is, stocked), and is notified when the number of ART games becomes "0". However, the number of ART games added by adding the number of bells may be immediately notified to the player (for example, a game that has reached a predetermined number of times, or a next game).

The mode of addition in the ART game is not limited to the above. For example, in the above-mentioned "special addition state" or "addition of the number of bells", a lottery may be performed in place of the addition of the number of ART games, or at the same time, whether or not the number of ART sets is added.

Further, in the ART game, the number of ART games (or the number of ART sets) may be added by an opportunity other than the above-mentioned additional opportunity. For example, the success or failure of the addition (whether or not to win) may be drawn based on the internal winning combination, and if the winning is won, the number of ART games may be added. In this case, the specific winning combination (for example, the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49) has a lower probability of being determined as the internal winning winning combination than the “pushing order small winning combination” that is the target of the above-mentioned “additional number of bells”. When "bonus duplicate combination" or "chance eye 1" and "chance eye 2") are determined as internal winning combinations, they may be added with a specific lottery probability (for example, 10923/32768≈1/3). It may be decided.

In addition, the "pushing order small winning combination" that is the target of the above-mentioned "addition of the number of bells" and the above-mentioned specific winning combination (for example, the "bonus overlapping winning combination" in the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. The success or failure of the addition (whether or not to win) may be drawn based on a plurality of internal winning combinations including "1" and "chance 2"). However, in this case, at least, the lottery probability that the "pushing order small winning combination" that is the target of the above-mentioned "additional number of bells" is determined to be added when it is determined as the internal winning combination is described above. It is desirable that the probability is lower than the specific lottery probability (for example, 32/32768 = 1/1024). Alternatively, if the "pushing order small winning combination" that is the target of the above-mentioned "additional number of bells" is determined as the internal winning combination, the success or failure (whether or not to win) of the additional addition based on the internal winning combination shall not be drawn. May be.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that the number of ART games (or the number of ART sets) can be added by a plurality of additional triggers. With this configuration, there is more variety in terms of adding the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in the advantageous game state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. You can do a lottery.

[Main control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 73.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the main control process. The main control process described below is started when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 executes the power-on processing shown in FIG. 64 (S10). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup is normal, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization processing is executed according to the determination result.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the initialization process at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area, the display combination storage area, and the like of the main RAM 95 are cleared.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 65 (S12). In this medal reception / start check process, a process of detecting a medal inserted by a player and a process of detecting a start operation are executed.

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts the random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S13). In this embodiment, the random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 66 (S14). The main CPU 93 that executes this internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determining means.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the lock determination process (S15). In this lock determination process, it is determined whether or not to perform the above-mentioned "lock".

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the reel stop initial setting process (S16). By this reel stop initial setting process, various stop control information of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 95 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

Next, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S17). The start command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as, for example, the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the game state, the type of the lock and its period, and the value of the bonus end number counter value.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the lock execution process at the start of the game (S18). In this game start lock execution process, the game start lock is executed and the reel action (effect according to the reel variation mode) during the lock execution is executed based on the determination result of the lock determination process in S15. For example, when "PBB" is independently elected as an internal winning combination (winning number "1"), the game start lock is executed for about 30 seconds (the lock timer value is "26853").

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the wait process (S19). In this wait process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the previous game (the start of the previous unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed. The waiting time to wait until is exhausted. The predetermined time in this wait process, that is, the wait time is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel rotation start process for rotating all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (S20). Along with this reel rotation start process, "01110000" is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 26). The reel rotation start control is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71 (more specifically, the reel control process shown in S324). This interrupt process is a process that is periodically executed at regular intervals (1.1172 ms).

By controlling the drive of the stepping motor by this interrupt processing, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R becomes a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute). Accelerate until it reaches. After that, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed, this constant speed rotation is maintained. When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed and the reel index described above is detected, the stop operation to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is permitted.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 ( S21). The reel rotation start command data is, for example, data for making it possible for the sub CPU 102 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has started.

By receiving the reel rotation start command data, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the reel rotation start, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the reel stop control process (S22). By this reel stop control process, the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed. Although not shown, in this reel stop control process, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and the generated reel stop command data is sent to the main RAM 95. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. This reel stop command data includes the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position (that is, the symbol position when the stop button is operated), the number of sliding pieces, or the scheduled stop position (that is, the reel is actually scheduled to stop). This is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the symbol position).

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the winning search process (S23). In this winning search process, after all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line is collated with the symbol combination table, and the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line is identified. To.

Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 23) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 13 to 15) are collated, and if there is a match as a result of the collation. , Data corresponding to the matching symbol combination (display combination) is stored in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 22), and the number of payouts (payout number counter value) associated with the combination of symbols is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a medal payout process of paying out the number of medals corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out as a result of the winning search process (S24). In this medal payout process, medals are paid out and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number counter value.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the state management process shown in FIG. 67 (S25). In this state management process, the transition control of the RT game state is mainly executed, and the on / off of the output of the external signal from the external centralized terminal plate 47 is managed.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the lock execution process at the end of the game (S26). In this game end lock execution process, based on the determination result of the lock determination process in S15, the game end lock is executed and the reel action (effect according to the reel variation mode) during the lock execution is executed. For example, if "PBB" and "BAR-matched fake clip" are duplicated as internal winners (winning number "2"), at the end of the game for about 27 seconds (lock timer value is "24167"). The lock is executed. In addition, when "PBB" wins a prize or when the PBB game state ends, a lock is executed at the end of the game for about 2 seconds ("1790" as the value of the lock timer), and "BB1 to 4" win a prize. If this is the case, or when the RT0 game state during BB, the RT2 game state during BB, or the RB game state during BB ends, the lock at the end of the game is executed for about 1 second (“895” as the value of the lock timer). , When "RB in BB" wins a prize in the RT game state during BB, the lock at the end of the game of "268" as the value of the lock timer is executed for about 0.3 seconds.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated winning operation command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S27). .. The winning operation command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the type of display combination and the payout number counter value.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the bonus end check process shown in FIG. 69 (S28). In this bonus end check process, when each end condition (transition condition) defined in the BB game state is satisfied, the process according to the end condition (transition condition) is executed.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 70 (S29). In this bonus operation check process, when each start condition (transition condition) of the BB game state is satisfied in the general game state, when the start condition (transition condition) of the RB game state during BB is satisfied in the BB game state, Alternatively, when the operating condition of the re-game is satisfied in the general gaming state and the BB gaming state, the processing according to the start condition (transition condition) and the operating condition is executed. The main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S11 after executing the process of step S29.

<Processing when power is turned on>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a power-on processing executed in step S10 of the main control processing shown in FIG. 63.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S30).
In this determination process, whether or not the backup is normal is determined by error detection using the checksum value.

For example, the main CPU 93 stores the set value of the pachi-slot machine 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value and the like as backup data in the main RAM 95 when the power is turned off, and the determination process (S30) when the power is turned on. In, the set value and the like and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95 are read out.

Then, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum calculated from the read set value and the like with the backed up checksum, and if the comparison results match, it is determined that the backup is normal.

When the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed up setting values and the like in the main RAM 95 (S31). As a result, if the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 95.

After executing the process of step S31, or when it is determined in step S30 that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 is a setting change switch (setting key) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1. It is determined whether or not the type switch 56) is on (S32). Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is on (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the initialization process at the time of setting change (S33).

In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area, the display combination storage area, the symbol code storage area, and the game state flag storage area of the main RAM 95 are cleared, and the set value is set. Is cleared. The data stored in the carry-over combination storage area may not be cleared, or may be cleared.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S34). .. The initialization command data is, for example, data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as whether or not the set value has been changed and the set value.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the set value change process (S35). In this set value change process, a set value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of a reset switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1, and subsequently, The set value selected when the start lever 23 is operated is fixed.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is in the ON state (S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until a determination result that is not in the ON state is obtained. ..

Here, the main CPU 93 is (NO) when a determination result is obtained that the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is not in the ON state (that is, when the setting change switch is turned from ON to OFF). , The initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is generated, the generated initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S37), and the power-on processing is performed. finish.

In step S32, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is not on (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S38). Here, if it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 executes power-on error processing (S39).

In the power-on error processing, the main CPU 93 indicates that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like. The main CPU 93 does not release the error state by operating the stop release switch (not shown) or the reset switch (not shown) in the state of an error (backup error) in which the backup is not normal. Therefore, the error state is canceled only when a new setting is changed.

If it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 restores the state of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the state before the power was cut off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 95. (S40), the process at power-on ends.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG. 63.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic closing request (S50). That is, it is determined whether or not the player has won the replay role in the previous unit game.

In step S50, when it is determined that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 93 executes an automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (S51). Specifically, the main CPU 93 copies the automatic closing counter to the closing number counter and clears the automatic closing counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The transmission process is executed (S52). Here, the medal insertion command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the insertion number counter, and the value of the credit counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the automatic input interval waiting process in order to set the replay operation recognition time for reliably operating the replay in this unit game (S53). In this automatic closing interval waiting process, "270" is set as the automatic closing interval waiting time timer (270 interrupts × 1.1172 ms ≈ 301.64 ms). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination is won in the previous unit game, the replay operation recognition time is provided, and the process related to the automatic input is surely performed.

The replay operation recognition time is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the replay operation recognition time may be configured to be different depending on the number of medals automatically inserted (for example, the values “1” to “3” of the automatic insertion counter). Specifically, when the number of automatically inserted medals is "1", "90" is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and the number of automatically inserted medals is "2". In some cases, "180" is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and when the number of automatically inserted medals is "3", "270" is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer. It may be that.

Further, the effect may be performed using this replay operation recognition time. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, in the RT0 game state during BB and the RT2 game state during BB, benefits are given according to the number of consecutive winnings (number of winnings) of the replay combination. Therefore, in the RT0 game state during BB and the RT2 game state during BB, if the value of the automatic input interval waiting time timer is set according to the number of consecutive winnings (the number of winnings) of the replay combination, it is locked for each unit game. Similarly, the progress of the game is stopped (the operation of the player is invalidated) without performing the determination process (see S15 in FIG. 63) or the lock execution process at the end of the game (see S26 in FIG. 63). Is possible.

Specifically, for example, in the RT0 game state during BB and the RT2 game state during BB, when the number of consecutive winnings (winning number) of the replay combination is 1 to 4, the automatic input interval waiting time timer is set to "270". , And if the number of consecutive winnings (winnings) of the replay combination is 5 to 9 times, set "540" as the automatic input interval waiting time timer, and the number of consecutive winnings (winnings) of the replay combination. When is 11 to 14 times, "810" is set as the automatic input interval waiting time timer, and when the number of consecutive winnings (winning times) of the replay combination is 16 to 19 times, the automatic input interval waiting is performed. "1080" is set as the time timer, and when the number of consecutive winnings (winning times) of the replay combination is 10, 15, 20 or more, "1350" is set as the automatic input interval waiting time timer.

With this configuration, in a specific game state (for example, RT0 game state in BB and RT2 game state in BB), a predetermined privilege (for example, a replay combination) is determined according to the number of consecutive winnings. , A card acquisition lottery to be described later) is given, and by using the replay operation recognition time, the same lock is performed without performing lock control (for example, lock determination process and lock execution process at the end of the game) for each game. Since the effect can be performed, it is possible to execute the lock effect without increasing the control load.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the lock timer (for example, "268") set when "RB in BB" is won is the minimum value set as the replay operation recognition time (for example, "270"). ") Less than. That is, the time during which the lock effect is executed when the "RB during BB" is won is set to be shorter than the replay operation recognition time.

With this configuration, in a specific game state (for example, RT0 game state in BB and RT2 game state in BB), a privilege (for example, a card acquisition described later) is obtained according to the number of consecutive winnings of a specific combination (for example, a replay combination). When a lottery privilege) is granted, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is difficult to grant this privilege by the execution time of the lock effect.

In step S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (NO), the main CPU 93 permits acceptance of medals (S54). For example, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid (not shown) of the selector 66 to form a path so that medals inserted into the medal insertion port 21 can pass through the selector 66.

In step S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the acceptance of medals has been prohibited since the previous unit game, so that the process related to the acceptance of medals Is not executed, but even if the player has won the replay role in the previous unit game, the acceptance of medals may be permitted.

After the process of step S53 or S54 is executed, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets in the main RAM 95 according to the gaming state (S55). In the present embodiment, 3 is set as the maximum value of the number of input sheets in any game state.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the acceptance of medals is permitted (S56). Here, when it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 93 checks whether the medals have been properly inserted or whether the BET button 22 has been operated. The process is executed (S57). In this medal insertion check process, when the medals are properly inserted, or when the medals are inserted by operating the BET button 22 from the credit, the value of the inserted number counter is set according to the number of inserted medals. Or the value of the credit counter is updated.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The transmission process is executed (S58).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited (S59). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 is subject to the condition that the value of the input number counter is 3 and the value of the credit counter is 50, or that the automatic insertion process of step S51 is executed. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined that the medal cannot be inserted or credited, and when the condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the medal can be inserted or credited.

If it is determined in step S59 that the medal cannot be inserted or credited (NO), the main CPU 93 prohibits the acceptance of the medal (S60). For example, the main CPU 93 forms a path so that the medals inserted into the medal insertion port 21 are ejected from the medal payout outlet 32 without driving the solenoid of the selector 66.

In step S56, when it is determined that the acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), in step S59, when it is determined that medals can be inserted or credited (YES), or after the process of step S60 is executed. , The main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is the number of medals that can start the game (S61). That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of inserted medals is 3, which is the maximum value.

Here, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S56. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is on (S62).

Here, if it is determined that the start switch 79 is not on (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S56. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 79 is on (YES), the main CPU 93 prohibits the acceptance of medals (S63) and ends the medal acceptance / start check process.

<Internal lottery process>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG. 63.

First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state in the main RAM 95 (S70). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 sets any of the internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 16 or 17 in the main RAM 95 according to the gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S71). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to a predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S70, acquires one lottery value associated with each winning number of the corresponding set value, and draws the lottery value from the random number value. Is subtracted (S72). That is, the main CPU 93 collates whether or not the internal winning combination associated with the winning number is determined.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the subtraction result by the process of step S72 is less than 0 (S73). Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S74).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers of the internal lottery table used have been checked (S75), and if it determines that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO), , Return to the process of step S72.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that all the winning numbers have been checked (YES), it sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S76). That is, the main CPU 93 determines "loss" as the internal winning combination.

In step S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table set in the main RAM 95 and starts from the winning number to the small winning combination / replay data pointer. The value and the value of the bonus data pointer are acquired (S77).

After executing the process of step S76 or S77, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18), and the internal winning combination is based on the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S78).

In the process of step S78, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and 16 bytes indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer acquired in the process of step S76 or S77. The data value of is determined.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the data of the internal winning combination acquired in step S78 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 21) (S79). In the process of step S79, a 16-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S78 is stored in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 16.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S80). When the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 19) and internally based on the value of the bonus data pointer. Acquire the winning combination (S81).

In the process of step S81, the bonus internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and a 16-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the process of step S76 or S77 is determined. To.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S81 in the carrying-over combination storage area (see FIG. 24) (S82). In the process of step S82, for example, when "PBB" is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S81, bit 0 corresponding to "PBB" in the carry-over storage area is set to "1".

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S83). In the process of step S83, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the bits 0 to 5 of the carry-over combination storage area in step S82.

If it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is "PBB" or "BB1 to 4" (S84). ). Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the internal winning combination is "PBB" or "BB1 to 4" (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT4 gaming state as the gaming state (S85). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the RT4 game status flag to "1" and clears the other RT game status flags to "0".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the internal winning combination is not "PBB" or "BB1 to 4" (that is, the internal winning combination is "RB in BB") (NO), it is in BB as a gaming state. Set the RT2 game state (S86). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 game status flag in BB to "1" and clears the RT0 game status flag in BB to "0".

When it is determined in step S80 that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is not 0 (NO), when it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carry-over combination storage area is 0 (YES), or the process of step S85 or step S86 is performed. After the execution, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S87), and ends the internal lottery process. That is, the main CPU 93 reflects the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area in the internal winning combination storage area, and determines the internal winning combination in the unit game.

<State management processing>
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the state management process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG. 63.

First, in the main CPU 93, when the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (that is, any of the RT0 gaming state during BB, the RT2 gaming state during BB, and the RB gaming state during BB). It is determined whether or not there is (S100). When the main CPU 93 determines that it is in the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (YES), the process proceeds to step S108.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, that is, a bonus combination (BB). It is determined whether or not the internal winning state (excluding the middle RB) is in (S101). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (YES), the process proceeds to step S108.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S101 that the current gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (NO), subsequently, "RT1 transition rips 1 to 16" or "RT1 transition symbols 1 to 8" It is determined whether or not any combination of the symbols in the above is displayed on the valid line (S102). When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of any of "RT1 transition rips 1 to 16" or "RT1 transition symbols 1 to 8" is displayed on the valid line (YES), RT1 is set as the gaming state. The game state is set (S103), and the process proceeds to step S108. Specifically, "1" is set in the RT1 game state flag, and "0" is cleared in other RT game state flags.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S102 that the combination of any of "RT1 transition rips 1 to 16" or "RT1 transition symbols 1 to 8" is not displayed on the valid line (NO). ) Next, it is determined whether or not any combination of symbols of "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2" is displayed on the valid line (S104). When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of any of the symbols of "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2" is displayed on the valid line (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state as the gaming state (S105), and steps. The process proceeds to S108. Specifically, "1" is set in the RT2 game state flag, and "0" is cleared in other RT game state flags.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S104 that the combination of any of the symbols of "RT2 transition rips 1 and 2" is not displayed on the valid line (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines "RT3 transition". It is determined whether or not the combination of any of the symbols of "Rip 1, 2" is displayed on the valid line (S106). When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of any of the symbols of "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2" is displayed on the valid line (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT3 gaming state as the gaming state (S107), and steps. The process proceeds to S108.
Specifically, "1" is set in the RT3 game state flag, and "0" is cleared in other RT game state flags.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S106 that the combination of any of the symbols of "RT3 transition rips 1 and 2" is not displayed on the valid line (NO), or after the process of step S107, The external signal output management process described later in the description of FIG. 68 is executed (S108), and the state management process is terminated.

<External signal output management processing>
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an external signal output management process executed in step S108 of the state management process shown in FIG. 67. In the present embodiment, the external signal 1 functions as a signal for displaying the number of winnings (number of winnings) of "PBB" and the execution of the PBB gaming state on an external display or the like, and the external signal 2 Functions as a signal for displaying the number of winnings (number of winnings) of "BB1 to 4" and the execution of the normal BB game state on an external display or the like, and the external signal 3 is the execution of the ART game. It functions as a signal for displaying the number of times and the fact that the ART game is being executed on an external device or the like.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "PBB" is displayed on the effective line (S120). When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of the symbols of "PBB" is displayed on the valid line (YES), the external signal 1 is set to ON (S121), and the external signal output management process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of the symbols of "PBB" is not displayed on the effective line (NO), subsequently, the combination of any of the symbols of "BB1 to 4" is the effective line. It is determined whether or not it is displayed above (S122). When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of any of the symbols "BB1 to 4" is displayed on the valid line (YES), the external signal 2 is set to ON (S123), and the external signal output management process is performed. To finish.

If the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S122 that the combination of any of the symbols "BB1 to 4" is not displayed on the valid line (NO), then "PBB" or "PBB" or " It is determined whether or not "BB1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination (S124). When it is determined that "PBB" or "BB1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the process proceeds to step S125, and "PBB" or "BB1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined that this has not been done (NO), the process proceeds to step S128.

The main CPU 93 sets the initial value “0” in the ART start check counter in the process of step S125. The ART start check counter is data for enabling the main CPU 93 side to recognize whether or not the ART game is being executed under the control of the sub CPU 102. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the external signal 3 is on (S126). When it is determined that the external signal 3 is on (YES), the external signal 3 is turned off (S127), and the external signal output management process is terminated. Also, when it is determined that the external signal 3 is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), the external signal output management process is terminated. That is, when the bonus combination is internally won during the ART game, the external signal 3 is turned off.

In the process of step S128, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state. If it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (YES), then the internal winning is either "left RT3 maintenance lip", "middle RT3 maintenance lip", or "right RT3 maintenance lip". It is determined whether or not it has been done (S129). If it is determined that none of the "left RT3 maintenance lip", "middle RT3 maintenance lip", or "right RT3 maintenance lip" has been internally won (NO), the external signal output management process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the "left RT3 maintenance lip", "middle RT3 maintenance lip", or "right RT3 maintenance lip" is internally won (YES), the player's stop operation order is subsequently changed. It is determined whether or not the push order is a predetermined one (S130).

Here, the "predetermined specific push order" means a specific stop operation order among the stop operation orders in which the RT3 gaming state is maintained. For example, if the "left RT3 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination and the first stop operation is the left first stop, the RT3 gaming state is changed regardless of the order of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. It will be maintained (see FIG. 20), but in the present embodiment, "left and right middle" is predetermined as a specific push order. Similarly, when the "middle RT3 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, "middle left and right" is predetermined as a specific push order, and when the "right RT3 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination. Predetermines "right, left, middle" as a specific push order.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S130 that the stop operation order of the player is not a predetermined specific push order (NO), the ART start check counter is set to "0", which is an initial value. (S131), and the external signal output management process is terminated. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the stop operation order of the player is a predetermined specific push order (YES), the ART start check counter is incremented by 1 (S132), and then the ART start is started. It is determined whether or not the check counter is "2" (S133). When it is determined that the ART start check counter is "2" (YES), the external signal 3 is set to ON (S121), and the external signal output management process is terminated. Also, when it is determined that the ART start check counter is not "2" (NO), the external signal output management process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a specific replay high probability state (for example, RT3 game state), a specific combination (for example, "left RT3 maintenance lip", "middle RT3 maintenance lip", or "right RT3 maintenance lip", or "right RT3 maintenance lip" ”) Is determined as an internal winning combination, and a specific stop operation sequence (for example, a predetermined specific push” among the stop operation sequences in which a specific replay high probability state (for example, RT3 game state) is maintained is maintained. Based on the number of times the stop operation is performed in the order) becomes a specific number of times (for example, twice), a specific game state (for example, an ART game described later) that is advantageous to the player is executed. It is configured to start outputting a signal (eg, an external signal 3).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ART game is started under the control of the sub CPU 102, a specific stop operation order (for example, a predetermined specific push order) is notified a specific number of times (for example, twice). It is configured to. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately output the start of a gaming state (for example, an ART game described later) that is advantageous to the player to the outside.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S128 that the current gaming state is not the RT3 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the external signal 3 is on (S135). When it is determined that the external signal 3 is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), the external signal output management process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the external signal 3 is on (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the push order small winning combination is internally won (S136). If it is determined that the push order small winning combination has not been internally won (NO), the external signal output management process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small winning combination has been internally won (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the medal has been paid out (S137). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a "missing" has occurred when the push order small winning combination is internally won.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S137 that the medal has been paid out (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the external signal output management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal is not paid out (NO), the external signal 3 is turned off (S138), and the external signal output management process is terminated. That is, during the ART game (or after the end of the ART game), if the push order small winning combination is won and "missing" occurs, the external signal 3 is turned off.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a specific signal (for example, an external signal 3) indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, an ART game described later) is being executed is output. , The output of this specific signal is terminated when the medal is not paid out even though the player wins the small winning combination internally. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately output the end of a gaming state (for example, an ART game described later) that is advantageous to the player to the outside.

<Bonus end check process>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a bonus end check process executed in step S28 of the main control process shown in FIG. 63.

First, in the main CPU 93, when the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (that is, any of the RT0 gaming state during BB, the RT2 gaming state during BB, and the RB gaming state during BB). It is determined whether or not there is (S150). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (NO), the bonus end check process ends.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter based on the value of the payout number counter. (S151). Specifically, the number of medals paid out in this game is subtracted from the bonus end number counter. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (S152). That is, it is determined whether or not the update result (subtraction result) by the process of step S151 is less than 0. If it is determined that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the process proceeds to step S158.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S152 that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the PBB / BB end time process (S153). In this PBB / BB end time processing, the PBB game state flag is cleared to "0" at the end of the PBB game state, and at the end of the normal BB game state, according to the state at the end. Clear the RT0 game status flag in BB, the RT2 game status flag in BB, or the RB game status flag in BB by "0". Further, at the end of the RT2 gaming state during BB, bit 5 of the carry-over combination storage area is cleared to "0" (the internal winning state of "RB during BB" is terminated). Also, the external signal 1 or the external signal 2 is turned off.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the end of the RT2 gaming state during BB (S154). When the main CPU 93 determines that it is the end of the RT2 gaming state during BB (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state as the gaming state (S155). That is, the replay high probability state shifted in the BB game state is taken over to the general game state after the end of the BB game state. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the end of the RT2 gaming state during BB (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the RT0 gaming state as the gaming state (S156).

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the bonus end command transmission process (S157), and ends the bonus end check process. In this bonus end command transmission process, bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is generated, and the generated bonus end command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. This bonus end command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the end of the BB game state, for example.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S152 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than 0 (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RB gaming state during BB. (S158). If it is determined that the current game state is the RB game state during BB (YES), and if a small winning combination is won in the unit game (that is, if a medal is paid out), the RB game during BB When the winning number counter that counts the number of winnings of the small winning combination in the state and the game number counter that counts the number of games in the RB gaming state during BB are subtracted by 1, and the small winning combination is not won in the unit game (that is, If no medals are paid out), the game count counter is decremented by 1 (S159).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning number counter or the game number counter is "0" (S160). If it is determined that neither the winning count counter nor the game count counter is "0" (NO), the bonus end check process is terminated. If it is determined that the winning number counter or the game number counter is "0" (YES), the RB end time processing during BB is executed (S161), and the bonus end check processing is ended. In this BB middle RB end processing, the BB middle RB game state flag is cleared to "0", and the BB middle RT0 game state flag is set to "1".

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S158 that the current gaming state is not the RB gaming state during BB (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state. (S162). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the PBB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. If it is determined that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state (YES), the PBB gaming state processing is executed (S163), and the bonus end check processing is terminated. In this PBB game state processing, the PBB game state is always in the specific RB game state (that is, the state in which the lottery value is drawn according to each lottery value of the PBB game state defined in the internal lottery table for the BB game state shown in FIG. 17). Is controlled to be.

In the present embodiment, the processes of steps S154 to 156 are performed (that is, the gaming state at the end of the BB gaming state is determined), and the winning probability of the replay combination in the BB gaming state is inherited in the general gaming state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 93 may be configured to take over the lottery value of the replay combination set at the end of the BB game state as it is in the general game state. In this case, if the lottery value of the replay combination in the RT0 game state during BB is set at the end of the RB game state during BB (or when the "RB during BB" is won), the above-mentioned steps S154 to 156 The process can be omitted.

<Bonus operation check process>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a bonus operation check process executed in step S29 of the main control process shown in FIG. 63.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state (S170). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the PBB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines that the current gaming state is the normal BB gaming state (that is, RT0 during BB, RT2 during BB). It is determined whether or not the player is in the game state (either the game state of the RB game state during BB) (S171). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal BB gaming state (NO), the process proceeds to step S176.

If the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S171 that the current gaming state is the normal BB gaming state (YES), then whether or not the current gaming state is the RB gaming state during BB. Is determined (S172). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the RB gaming state during BB (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S172 that the current gaming state is not the RB gaming state during BB (NO), the combination of the symbols of "RB during BB" is subsequently displayed on the valid line. It is determined whether or not it is (S173). When the main CPU 93 determines (NO) that the combination of the symbols of "RB in BB" is not displayed on the valid line, the bonus operation check process is terminated.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S173 that the combination of the symbols of "RB in BB" is displayed on the valid line (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the process at the time of RB operation in BB (S174). In this BB middle RB operation time processing, "1" is set in the BB middle RB game state flag, and "0" is cleared in the BB middle RT2 game state flag. Further, "8" is set in the winning count counter, and "12" is set in the game counter. Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S175), and ends the bonus operation check process. That is, the main CPU 93 clears bit 5 of the carry-over combination storage area by "0".

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S171 that the current gaming state is not the normal BB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines that the symbol of either "PBB" or "BB1-4". It is determined whether or not the combination is displayed on the valid line (S176).
When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of any of the symbols "PBB" or "BB1 to 4" is not displayed on the valid line (NO), the process proceeds to step S180.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S176 that the combination of any of the symbols "PBB" or "BB1 to 4" is displayed on the valid line (YES), the process during PBB / BB operation is performed. Is executed (S177). In this PBB / BB operation processing, if the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line is a combination of symbols of "PBB", "1" is set in the PBB game state flag, and another game state flag (for example, , RT4 game status flag) is cleared to "0", and "297" is set in the bonus end number counter. If the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line is any combination of symbols of "BB1 to 4", "1" is set in the RT0 game state flag in BB, and another game state flag (for example, , RT4 game status flag) is cleared to "0", and "44" is set in the bonus end number counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area corresponding to the winning bonus combination (S178), executes the bonus start command transmission process (S179), and ends the bonus operation check process. In this bonus start command transmission process, bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is generated, and the generated bonus start command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95.
This bonus start command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the start of the BB game state, for example.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S176 that neither the combination of the symbols "PBB" or "BB1 to 4" is displayed on the valid line (NO), it is shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a combination of symbols of any of the replay combinations is displayed on the valid line (S180). When the main CPU 93 determines that a combination of symbols of any of the replay combinations is displayed on the valid line (YES), the main CPU 93 issues an automatic input request (that is, a request process for activating the replay in the next unit game). Perform (S181), and end the bonus operation check process. Also, if it is determined that none of the combinations of the symbols of the replay combination is displayed on the valid line (NO), the bonus operation check process is terminated.

<Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93. This process is performed periodically every 1.1172 ms.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S320). Next, the main CPU 93 executes the input port check process described later in the description of FIG. 72 (S321). In this input port check process, for example, the presence or absence of signals from various switches and sensors connected to the main CPU 93 is confirmed.

For example, the main CPU 93 stores on-edge and off-edge information of various switches such as a start switch 79 and a stop switch (not shown) and on / off information of various sensors such as a medal sensor (not shown) in the main RAM 95.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the timer update process (S322). In this timer update process, for example, when the value of the lock timer, the automatic input interval waiting time timer, or the like is 1 or more, a process of subtracting the value of the timer by "1" for each interrupt is executed. Next, the main CPU 93 executes the communication data transmission process described later in the description of FIG. 73 (S323). Next, the main CPU 93 executes the reel control process (S324). In this reel control process, for example, an acceleration process for accelerating the rotation of each reel is executed by driving and controlling each stepping motor based on the rotation start request of each reel in the reel rotation start process (S20 in FIG. 63). Then, based on the fact that each reel reaches a predetermined speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute), by driving and controlling each stepping motor, a constant speed process for maintaining the predetermined speed is executed and stopped. Based on the rotation stop request of each reel in the control process (S22 of FIG. 63), the stop process of stopping the rotation of each reel is executed by driving and controlling each stepping motor.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the lamp 7SEG drive process (S325). For example, the main CPU 93 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units. Next, the main CPU 93 restores the register (S326) and ends the interrupt process that occurs periodically.

<Input port check process>
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 shown in FIG. 71.

First, the main CPU 93 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the state of the input port before the previous interrupt, that is, one interrupt, in the main RAM 95 (S331), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 95 (S332).

In this way, by comparing the state of the input port one interrupt before with the state of the current input port, the main CPU 93 can check the state of both input ports, and the state of the input port can be confirmed. It is checked whether the state has changed, for example, whether the BET button 22, the start lever 23, or the like has been operated.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 95 (S333). For example, in the main CPU 93, when the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 79 was data indicating off before one interrupt, but now it is data indicating on, it is transferred to on-edge. The on-edge information indicating that is stored in the main RAM 95, and the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 79 was the data indicating on before one interrupt, but is now the data indicating off. If there is, the main RAM 95 stores the off-edge information indicating that the data has been transferred to the off-edge.

<Communication data transmission processing>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a communication data transmission process executed in step S323 of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 shown in FIG. 71.

First, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the communication data transmission timer (S340). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the communication data transmission timer is 0 (S341).

Here, if it is determined that the communication data transmission timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the communication data transmission process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the communication data transmission timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (S342).

Here, when it is determined that there is no untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (NO), the main CPU 93 generates non-operation command data, and the generated non-operation command data is assigned to the main RAM 95. It is stored in the storage area (S343).

In the non-operation command data, on-edge and off-edge information of various switches and on / off information of various sensors stored in the above-mentioned input port check process are set as each parameter. As a result, it is possible to prevent an interrupt process in which the command is not transmitted and prevent fraudulent acts against the command transmission, and by causing the sub CPU 102 to recognize this information, the period during which the operation is originally invalid is possible. It is possible to change the effect based on the operation (for example, the operation on the BET button 22 while the reel is rotating).

When it is determined in step S342 that there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (YES), or after executing the process of step S343, the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 14) in the communication data transmission timer. (S344).

Next, the main CPU 51 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101 (S345). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the transmission of communication data is completed (S346).

Here, if it is determined that the transmission of the communication data is not completed (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S345. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transmission of the communication data is completed (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the communication data storage area so as to clear it (S347), and ends the communication data transmission process.

[Sub-control processing]
Next, various processes executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 89.

<Power-on process>
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a power-on process of the sub CPU 102 when the power is turned on.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization process (S350). In this initialization process, the sub CPU 102 checks for errors in the sub RAM 83 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, which is a task group for timer interrupt synchronization, and a sound control task.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task shown in FIG. 75 (S351).
The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive the timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving this timer interrupt event message, the lamp control task of various lamps. It is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the sound control task shown in FIG. 76 (S352). In the sound control task, the sound output state of the speakers such as the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R is controlled by the sub CPU 102. Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task (S353) and ends the power-on process. In the mother task, the main board communication task shown in FIG. 77 and the display control task (not shown) for controlling the display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are activated.

<Lamp control task>
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in step S351 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 74.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes the timer interrupt initialization process (S360). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization process of the lamp-related data (S361).

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the timer interrupt wait (S362). In this process, a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization is executed until the sub CPU 102 receives the timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds.

As a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization can be mentioned. In addition, a task group for power interrupt synchronization (not shown), a task group for door monitoring unit communication synchronization (not shown), and the like can be mentioned.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the sound control task shown in FIG. 76 (S363). In this process, the task in the next priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group, which is the same group as the lamp control task, is executed.

In the present embodiment, the priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group is basically in the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task having the next priority after the lamp control task is executed. In step S363, among the sound control tasks shown in FIG. 76, the processes of steps S372 and S373 are executed.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an analysis process of the lamp data that determines the light emitting mode of the LED 85 included in the determined effect data (S364), executes a lamp effect execution process based on the lamp data (S365), and steps. Return to the process of S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task activated in step S352 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 74.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization processing of sound-related data related to the sound output state of the speakers such as the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R (S370). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a task having the next priority in the timer interrupt synchronization task group, which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S371).

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a sound data analysis process (S372) that determines the sound output mode of the speakers such as the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R included in the determined effect data, and converts the sound data into sound data. The sound effect execution process based on this is performed (S373), and the process of step S371 is executed.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task started in the mother task started in step S353 shown in FIG. 74.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S380) and checks the reception command (S381).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S382). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 returns to the process of step S381.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a command different from the previous one is received (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is a legitimate command, and creates game information from the received command. The game information is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S383). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the command analysis process shown in FIG. 78 (S384), and returns to the process of step S381.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed in step S384 of the main board communication task shown in FIG. 77.

The sub CPU 102 executes the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79 (S390), executes the lamp data determination process (S391), and performs the sound data determination process based on the type of the received command and the information included in the command data. Is executed (S392), each determined data is registered (S393), and the command analysis process is terminated.

<Production content determination process>
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process executed in step S390 of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 78.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the initialization command has been received (S400). Here, if it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization command reception processing (S401), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the initialization command reception processing, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the initialization command is set. For example, the effect state is restored or the effect state is initialized based on whether or not the setting is changed. Further, for example, when the setting is changed, the mode in the normal game is determined by lottery.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (S402). Here, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the medal insertion command reception processing (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception processing, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command is set. For example, production data for outputting a medal insertion sound is set based on whether or not a medal is inserted. In addition, effect data for displaying a background image according to the mode and the game state is set.

Further, in the medal insertion command reception processing, the medal insertion command transmitted based on the automatic insertion processing (see S51 in FIG. 65) (that is, operating the replay) is performed (see S52 in FIG. 65). Is received, the effect data for outputting the automatic input sound notifying that the re-game is activated is set. Here, in the present embodiment, a predetermined waiting time (replay operation recognition time) is set at the time of the replay operation, but the automatic input sound is during the predetermined waiting time (replay operation recognition time). It is configured to be output even if.

With this configuration, even if the waiting time for recognizing the operation of the replay (for example, the replay operation recognition time) is set, the player can be notified of the replay operation without delay. Can be recognized.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start command has been received (S404). Here, when it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the start command reception time process described later in the description of FIG. 80 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the process when the start command is received, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the start command is set. For example, in an ART game, if the internal winning combination is a push order combination, effect data for notifying the procedure of the stop operation that is most advantageous for the player is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S406). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel rotation start command reception processing (S407), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception processing, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command is set. For example, the effect data for outputting the reel rotation start sound is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S408). Here, if it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the reel stop command reception processing (S409), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the reel stop command reception processing, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command is set. For example, the effect data for outputting the reel stop sound is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lock command has been received (S410). Here, if it is determined that the lock command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the lock command reception process (S411), and ends the effect content determination process. In the lock command reception processing, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the lock command is set.
For example, effect data for displaying an image according to the type of lock is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lock command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S412). Here, when it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the winning operation command reception processing described later in the description of FIG. 88 (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. .. In the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command is set. For example, production data for outputting the payout sound according to the number of payouts according to the winning combination is set. Further, for example, when the gaming state shifts, effect data for displaying an image indicating that fact is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S414). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the bonus start command reception processing (S415), and ends the effect content determination process. In the processing at the time of receiving the bonus start command, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command is set. For example, effect data for displaying the initial value of the bonus end number counter according to the type of bonus to be started is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S416). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the bonus end command reception time process described later in the description of FIG. 89 (S417), and ends the effect content determination process. .. In the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command, the effect data based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command is set. For example, the effect data for suggesting the game state to be transferred after the end of the bonus is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the no-operation command has been received (S418). Here, if it is determined that the non-operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the non-operation command reception processing (S419), and ends the effect content determination processing.

In the non-operation command reception processing, the effect data may be changed based on the information transmitted as the non-operation command. For example, when the effect data determined in the process at the time of receiving the start command is the effect data requesting repeated pressing of the BET button 22, the BET button 22 received as a non-operation command is in the on-edge state or the off-edge state. The production data is changed based on the information. On the other hand, in S418, when it is determined that the no-operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process.

<Processing when receiving start command>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a start command reception time process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the PBB game state is in progress (S430).
When the sub CPU 102 determines that the game is in the PBB game state (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the number of additional ART games in PBB shown in FIG. 28, and determines the number of additional ART games based on the internal winning combination (S431). , The determined number of additional ART games is added to the number of ART games (S432), and the process proceeds to step S442.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S430 that it is not in the PBB gaming state (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not it is in the ART gaming (S433).
When the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the ART game in-game process described later in the description of FIG. 81 (S434), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S433 that the ART game is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the battle CZ is in progress (S435). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the battle CZ is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the battle CZ process described later in the description of FIG. 84 (S436), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S435 that it is not in battle CZ (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not it is in normal BB (S437). When the sub CPU 102 determines that it is in the normal BB (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the normal BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 85 (S438), and proceeds to the processing in step S442.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S437 that it is not normally in BB (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not it is in item CZ (S439). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the item is in the item CZ (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the item CZ processing described later in the description of FIG. 86 (S440), and proceeds to the processing in step S442.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S439 that the item CZ is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes the normal in-game process described later in the description of FIG. 87 (S441), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

Next, if the effect data has not yet been set, the sub CPU 102 sets the start effect data according to the internal winning combination (S442), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command. In the process of step S442, for example, during the additional BB or during the battle CZ, the HP subtraction success / failure and the start-time effect data according to the HP subtraction value are set, and during the normal BB, the card acquisition success / failure and the card The start effect data according to the type is set, and if it is in the item CZ, the start effect data according to the card type to be used and the result of the ART lottery is set, and if it is in a normal game, it is the current mode. The start production data according to the internal winning combination is set.

<Processing during ART game>
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the ART game in-game process executed in step S434 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 80.

First, the sub CPU 102 sets the navigation data during the ART game according to the internal winning combination (S450). In the process of step S450, for example, in the RT0 gaming state, when the "pushing order small winning combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the "RT transition symbols 1 to 8" are displayed to shift to the RT1 gaming state, so that the game is stopped. Navigation data during ART game is set for which the operation order is not notified. Further, in the RT1 game state, when the "RT2 transition lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation order in which the "RT2 transition lip 1, 2" is displayed is notified in order to shift to the RT2 game state. The navigation data during the ART game to be played is set.

Further, in the RT2 game state, when the "RT2 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation order in which "normal rips 1 to 8" are displayed is notified in order to maintain the RT2 game state. If the navigation data during the ART game is set and the "RT3 transition lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the "RT3 transition lip 1 and 2" will be displayed in order to shift to the RT3 game state. The navigation data during the ART game in which the stop operation order is notified is set. Further, in the RT3 game state, when the "RT3 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation order in which "normal rips 1 to 8" are displayed is notified in order to maintain the RT3 game state. The navigation data is set during the ART game. In addition, in the RT1 to 3 gaming states, when the "pushing order small winning combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the "upper bell" is used to increase the medals and maintain the RT gaming state in the RT2 and RT3 gaming states. 1 to 4 ”,“ Cross-up bell ”, or“ Middle bell ”will be displayed. In the unit game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the determined bonus combination symbols can be displayed, the navigation data during the ART game in which the determined combination of the bonus combination symbols is notified. May be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the current RT game state is the replay low probability state (for example, RT0 game state or RT1 game state), and the replay high probability state is the RT game state in which the ART game is performed (RT3 game state). ) Is different from the RT game state (RT2 game state), but it is managed as being in the "ART game", but it is a case where it is decided to shift to the ART game, and the RT3 game If it has not shifted to the state, it may be managed as being in the "ART ready state" which is a different management state. That is, the RT game state (RT3 game state) in which the ART game is performed and the other RT game states (for example, RT0 to RT2 game states) may be managed by different management states.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional BB is in progress (S451). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional BB is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the additional BB processing described later in the description of FIG. 82 (S452), and ends the ART gaming processing.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S451 that the addition BB is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the addition is in the special addition state (S453).
When the sub CPU 102 determines that the special addition state is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the special addition state processing (S454), and ends the ART game processing. In this special addition state processing, as described above, the continuous lottery of the set in the special addition state and the lottery of the number of additional ART games are performed.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S453 that the special addition state is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the preferential mode lock flag is on (S455). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the above-mentioned preferential state is obtained during the ART game. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the preferential mode lock flag is ON (YES), the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S460.

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S455 that the preferential mode lock flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently wins the same color bonus (that is, BB1 or BB3) internally. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S456). If it is determined that the same color bonus has been internally won (YES), the process proceeds to step S458.

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S456 that the same color bonus has not been internally won (NO), has the sub CPU 102 subsequently internally won the different color bonus (that is, BB2 or BB4) during the preferential mode? It is determined whether or not (S457). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the unique color bonus has been internally won during the preferential mode (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the preferential mode lock flag (S458), and proceeds to the process of step S460.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S457 that the unique color bonus has not been internally won during the preferential mode (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART middle mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 58 and becomes the internal winner. Based on this, the mode transition lottery is executed (S459), and the mode during the ART game is set based on the lottery result.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART game number update (subtraction) process (S460). In this ART game number update (subtraction) process, when an ART game other than the additional BB or the special additional state is in progress and the RT3 game is in the RT3 game state, the number of ART games set for each unit game is set to "1". "Subtract and update one by one. Therefore, for example, when shifting to the ART game after the end of the PBB game state, the number of ART games is not subtracted in the RT0 to 2 game states, and the subtraction of the number of ART games is started after shifting to the RT3 game state. The Rukoto. In addition, during the ART game, the stop operation is performed by a stop operation procedure different from the stop operation procedure notified by the player, and when the RT3 game state is changed to the RT1 game state, the state is changed to the RT3 game state again. The number of ART games is subtracted even before the game is played. Further, in the RT4 game state in which the bonus combination is internally won, the number of ART games may not be subtracted and updated, or the number of ART games may be subtracted and updated until the internal lottery result is announced.

Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART game end check process described later in the description of FIG. 83 (S461), and ends the ART game in-game process.

<Additional BB processing>
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the additional BB processing executed in step S452 of the ART gaming processing shown in FIG. 81.

First, the sub CPU 102 sets the push order small combination (small combination / replay data pointer value is "26" to "37") or RB small / medium combination (small combination / replay data pointer value is "45"). It is determined whether or not an internal winner has been won (S470). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the push order small combination or the RB small / medium combination has been internally won (YES), the above-mentioned lottery possible number of times is added by "1" (S471). In addition, even when the "unquestioned bell" (the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "38") is internally won, the number of lottery possible times may be added by "1".

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S470 that the push order small combination or the RB small / medium combination has not been internally won (NO), or if the process of step S471 is performed, a lottery can be subsequently performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times is "5" or more (S472). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times the lottery can be performed is "5" or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the additional BB processing. That is, when the number of winnings of the push order small winning combination or the RB small and medium small winning combination is 5, a lottery for shifting to the special addition state in the "additional BB" (that is, the subtraction lottery of "HP"). The lottery period in which the event is held will end.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S472 that the number of times the lottery is possible is not "5" or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 50, and refers to the enemy type and the internal winning combination. The HP subtraction success / failure lottery is executed based on (S473). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (S474).
When the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the HP subtraction value lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 51, determines the HP subtraction value based on the internal winning combination, and currently The HP subtraction value determined from the HP value of is subtracted (S475).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S474 that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has not been won (that is, non-winning) (NO), or when the process of step S475 is performed, the above-mentioned is subsequently described. It is determined whether or not the number of continuous replays is "5" or more (S476). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of continuous replays is "5" or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during the continuous ART of the rip shown in FIG. 52, and is based on the enemy type and the number of continuous replays. Then, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is executed (S477). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (S478).
When the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the HP subtraction value lottery table during ART for the rip continuous enemies A to C shown in FIG. 53, or the rip continuous enemies shown in FIG. 54. The HP subtraction value lottery table during ART for D is referred to, the HP subtraction value is determined based on the number of consecutive replays, and the determined HP subtraction value is subtracted from the current HP value (S479).

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S478 that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has not been won (that is, is not won) (NO), or if the process of step S479 is performed, then the current current It is determined whether or not the HP value is "0" or less (S480). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the current HP value is "0" or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the special addition state flag, which is information for shifting to the special addition state after the end of the addition BB (YES). S481), the process during the addition BB is completed. Also, when it is determined that the current HP value is not "0" or less (that is, "1" or more) (NO), the additional BB processing is terminated.

<ART game end check process>
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the additional BB processing executed in step S461 of the ART gaming processing shown in FIG. 81.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ART games is "0" (S490). When it is determined that the number of ART games is not "0" (that is, "1" or more) (NO), the ART game end check process is terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART games is "0" (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART games is in stock (S491). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an additional ART game number by adding the number of bells described above. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART games is in stock (YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the number of stocked ART games to the number of ART games (S492), and ends the ART game end check process. Although not shown, production data indicating that there are a number of ART games in stock and how many ART games were in stock in connection with the process of step S492. Is set.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S491 that the number of ART games is not in stock (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets is "1" or more (S493). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART sets is "1" or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value (50) to the number of ART games (S494), and subtracts "1" from the number of ART sets (S494). S495), the ART game end check process is terminated.

When the sub CPU 102 determines (NO) that the number of ART sets is not "1" or more (that is, "0") in the process of step S493, the ART end mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 60 is displayed. With reference to this, the mode transition lottery is executed (S496), and the mode during the normal game is set based on the lottery result. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game from the next game (S497), sets the initial value (0) in the number of ceiling games (S498), and ends the ART game end check process. Although not shown, the sub CPU 102 gives preferential treatment when it is determined in the process of step S493 that the number of ART sets is not "1" or more (that is, "0") (NO). If the mode lock flag is on, turn off the preferential mode lock flag.

<Battle CZ processing>
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the process during battle CZ executed in step S436 of the process at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. 80.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART winning flag is on (S500). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it has already been decided to shift to the ART game during the battle CZ. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines that the push order small winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer value is "26" to "26". It is determined whether or not the RB small / medium-sized combination (small combination / replay data pointer value is “45”) has been internally won (S501). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the push order small combination or the RB small / medium combination has been internally won (YES), the above-mentioned lottery possible number of times is added by "1" (S502). In addition, even when the "unquestioned bell" (the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "38") is internally won, the number of lottery possible times may be added by "1".

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S501 that the push order small combination or the RB small / medium combination has not been internally won (NO), or if the process of step S502 is performed, a lottery can be subsequently performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times is "5" or more (S503). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times the lottery is possible is "5" or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the battle CZ. That is, when the number of winnings of the push order small role or the RB small and medium size combination is 5, the lottery for shifting to the ART game (that is, the subtraction lottery of "HP") is performed during "Battle CZ". The lottery period to be held will end.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S503 that the number of lottery possible times is not "5" or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 30 and is based on the character type and the internal winning combination. Then, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is executed (S504). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (S505).
When the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the HP subtraction value lottery table for character A shown in FIG. 31, the HP subtraction value lottery table for character B shown in FIG. Refer to the HP subtraction value lottery table for character C shown in (1), determine the HP subtraction value based on the internal winning combination, and subtract the determined HP subtraction value from the current HP value (S506).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S505 that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has not been won (that is, non-winning) (NO), or when the process of step S506 is performed, the above-mentioned is subsequently described. It is determined whether or not the number of continuous replays is "5" or more (S507). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of consecutive replays is "5" or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 34, and based on the number of consecutive replays, the success / failure of HP subtraction. The lottery is executed (S508). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (S509). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the HP subtraction value lottery table for the rip continuous character A shown in FIG. 35 and the HP subtraction value for the rip continuous character B shown in FIG. Refer to the lottery table or the HP subtraction value lottery table for the continuous character C shown in FIG. 37, determine the HP subtraction value based on the number of consecutive replays, and subtract the determined HP subtraction value from the current HP value. (S510).

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S509 that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has not been won (that is, is not won) (NO), or if the process of step S510 is performed, then the current current It is determined whether or not the HP value is "0" or less (S511). When the sub CPU 102 determines (NO) that the current HP value is not "0" or less (that is, "1" or more), the process during battle CZ ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current HP value is "0" or less (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART winning flag (S512) and sets the initial value (50) in the number of ART games. (S513).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games at the time of winning ART during the battle CZ shown in FIG. 38, and executes the lottery for adding the number of ART games based on the number of lottery possible times and the internal winning combination (S514). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery for adding the number of ART games has been won (S515). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional lottery for the number of ART games has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the additional ART game number lottery table at the time of winning the ART during the battle CZ shown in FIG. 39, and is based on the number of possible lottery. The number of additional ART games (multiple) is determined, the number of ART games is added according to the determination result (S519), and the process during battle CZ is completed. Further, the sub CPU 102 also ends the battle CZ processing even when it is determined (NO) that the lottery for adding the number of ART games has not been won (that is, non-winning).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S500 that the ART winning flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the battle CZ shown in FIG. 40, and becomes an internal winning combination. Based on this, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is executed (S516).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery for adding the number of ART games has been won (S517). If it is determined that the number of ART games has been won in the additional lottery (YES), the number of additional ART games in the battle CZ shown in FIG. 41 is referred to, and the number of additional ART games is determined based on the internal winning combination. , The number of ART games is added according to the decision result (S518), and the processing during the battle CZ is completed. Further, the sub CPU 102 also ends the battle CZ processing even when it is determined (NO) that the lottery for adding the number of ART games has not been won (that is, non-winning).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a lottery (for example, HP) is made to determine whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the internal winning combination during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ). (Lottery of subtraction value) is performed, and when this specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, "0" or less), it is determined to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game). It is configured to.

Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery (for example, a lottery for the HP subtraction value) is made to determine whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the number of consecutive winnings of the specific combination (for example, the replay combination). Is configured to be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the type of character for which it is determined whether or not to win a lottery (for example, a lottery for HP subtraction value) as to whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP). It is configured to vary depending on.

Further, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ), a specific role (for example, replay) is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, internal winning of "JAC"). The winning probability of the winning combination is high (for example, the game shifts to the RT2 gaming state during BB).

Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific numerical value (for example, HP) becomes a specific update result (for example, "0" or less), the number of times a predetermined small winning combination including the pushing order small winning combination is won (for example). , The number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) can be added based on the number of lottery possible games.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding the lottery for notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, the lottery for transition to the ART game). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery period (for example, the number of times that a lottery is possible) in which whether or not to update the above-mentioned specific numerical value (for example, HP) is drawn during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ) The number of times a predetermined small winning combination including a pushing order small winning combination is won in a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ) is a predetermined number of times (for example, a period until the number of times is 5). For example, it is configured to end when (5 times).

With this configuration, even if the player intentionally misses the push order small role, the lottery period does not increase, so that the game store is prevented from suffering an unexpected disadvantage. be able to. That is, there is more diversity in the lottery (for example, the lottery for transition to ART games) as to whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player while appropriately balancing the profits of the player and the game store. A rich lottery can be held.

<Normal BB processing>
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the normal BB processing executed in step S438 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 80.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART winning flag is on (S530). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it has already been decided to shift to the ART game during the normal BB. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines that the push order small winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer value is "26" to "26". It is determined whether or not the RB small / medium-sized combination (small combination / replay data pointer value is “45”) is internally won (S531). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the push order small combination or the RB small / medium combination has been internally won (YES), the above-mentioned lottery possible number of times is added by "1" (S532). In addition, even when the "unquestioned bell" (the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "38") is internally won, the number of lottery possible times may be added by "1".

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S531 that the push order small combination or the RB small / medium combination has not been internally won (NO), or if the process of step S532 is performed, a lottery can be subsequently performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times is "5" or more (S533). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of lottery possible times is "5" or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 normally ends the BB processing. That is, when the number of winnings of the push order small combination or the RB small and medium-sized combination is 5, the lottery of the lottery right that can receive the lottery for shifting to the ART game in the "normal BB" (that is, " The lottery period in which the "card" acquisition lottery) will be held will end.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S533 that the number of times the lottery is possible is not "5" or more (NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 42, and based on the internal winning combination, the card The winning success / failure lottery is executed (S534). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the card acquisition success / failure lottery has been won (S535). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the card acquisition success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the card type lottery table shown in FIG. 43, determines the card type based on the internal winning combination, and determines the determined card type. Is stored and the number of cards is updated (S536).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S535 that the card acquisition success / failure lottery has not been won (that is, non-winning) (NO), or when the process of step S536 is performed, the above-mentioned is subsequently described. It is determined whether or not the number of continuous replays is "5" or more (S507). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of consecutive replays is "5" or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the continuous replay card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 44, and based on the number of consecutive replays, the success / failure of card acquisition. The lottery is executed (S538). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the card acquisition success / failure lottery has been won (S539). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the card acquisition success / failure lottery has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the card type lottery table shown in FIG. 45, determines the card type based on the number of consecutive replays, and determines the determined card type. Is stored and the number of cards is updated (S540).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S539 that the card acquisition success / failure lottery has not been won (that is, non-winning) (NO), or when the process of step S540 is performed, the sub CPU 102 subsequently performs the current process. It is determined whether or not the number of cards is "8" or more (S541). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the current number of cards is not "8" or more (that is, "7" or less) (NO), the sub CPU 102 normally ends the BB processing. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current number of cards is "8" or more (YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART winning flag (S542) and sets the initial value (50) in the number of ART games. (S543).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the card surplus time addition ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48, executes a lottery for the number of additional ART games for each surplus card type, and adds the number of ART games according to the lottery result. Then (S544), the normal BB processing is terminated.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S530 that the ART winning flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the normal BB shown in FIG. 46, and becomes an internal winning combination. Based on this, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is executed (S545).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery for adding the number of ART games has been won (S546). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional ART game number lottery has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 usually refers to the additional ART game number lottery table in BB, and determines the additional ART game number based on the internal winning combination. , The number of ART games is added according to the determination result (S518), and the normal BB processing is terminated. Further, even when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional lottery for the number of ART games has not been won (that is, non-winning) (NO), the normal BB processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB), a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) is based on the number of consecutive winnings of the specific combination (for example, replay combination). ) Is granted from among a plurality of types of lottery rights (for example, cards) having different expectations, and a predetermined lottery state (for example, an item) is transferred after the end of a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB). In CZ), a transition lottery of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) according to the granted lottery right is performed.

With this configuration, in a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB), a lottery for whether or not to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) is indirectly (that is, a lottery right). Since the lottery is performed (as a lottery), a predetermined special gaming state (for example, for example) is compared with the case where the lottery for whether or not to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) is performed only directly. It is possible to increase the probability of winning a lottery (that is, a lottery of lottery rights) in normal BB).

Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned lottery right (for example, a card) is further granted based on the internal winning combination during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of lottery rights granted (for example, the number of cards) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 8 cards), the lottery state (for example, item CZ) does not occur. It is configured to transition to a specific advantageous gaming state (eg, ART gaming).

With this configuration, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding the lottery for notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, the lottery for transition to the ART game). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB), a specific combination (for example, replay) is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the internal winning of "JAC"). From a specific role low probability state (for example, RT0 game state in BB) with a low winning probability of a specific role) to a specific role high probability state (for example, RT2 game state in BB) with a high probability of winning a specific role (for example, a replay combination) When the predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) ends, if the player shifts to the specific winning combination high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state during BB), at least the predetermined lottery state (for example, the predetermined lottery state) For example, in the item CZ), the specific winning combination high probability state is inherited (RT game state is set).

With this configuration, a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) is drawn with a high probability during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) (for example, RT2 gaming state during BB). Even in such a case, the game can be further enhanced without becoming monotonous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery period (for example, the number of times that the lottery can be performed is 5 times) in which the above-mentioned lottery right (for example, a card) is drawn during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) is reached. The period) is specified, and in this lottery period, the number of times a predetermined small winning combination including a pushing order small winning combination is won in a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). It is configured to exit.

With this configuration, even if the player intentionally misses the push order small role, the lottery period does not increase, so that the game store is prevented from suffering an unexpected disadvantage. be able to. That is, there is more diversity in the lottery (for example, the lottery for transition to ART games) as to whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player while appropriately balancing the profits of the player and the game store. A rich lottery can be held.

<Item CZ processing>
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the processing during item CZ executed in step S440 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command shown in FIG. 80.

First, the sub CPU 102 sets the navigation data in the item CZ according to the internal winning combination (S560). In the process of step S560, when the "RT2 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT2 game state, the stop operation in which "normal rips 1 to 8" are displayed in order to maintain the RT2 game state. When the navigation data during ART game that informs the order is set and "RT3 transition lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, "RT3 transition lip 1 and 2" is displayed because it does not shift to the RT1 game state. The navigation data in the item CZ in which the stop operation order to be notified is notified is set. Further, in the RT3 game state, when the "RT3 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation order in which "normal rips 1 to 8" will be displayed is notified because the game does not shift to the RT1 game state. The navigation data in the item CZ is set. Further, in the RT0, RT2 or RT3 gaming states, when the "pushing order small winning combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the medals are increased, and in the RT2 and RT3 gaming states, the transition to the RT1 gaming state is not performed. The item CZ middle navigation data for notifying the stop operation order in which the "upper bells 1 to 4", "cross-up bell", or "middle bell" will be displayed is set. In addition, in the unit game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the determined bonus combination symbols can be displayed, the navigation data in the item CZ in which the determined combination of the bonus combination symbols is notified. May be set.

In addition, when the RT gaming state at the start of item CZ is the RT0 gaming state, if the "pushing order small winning combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, "RT transition symbols 1 to 8" are displayed and the RT1 gaming state is entered. In order to shift, the navigation data in the item CZ in which the stop operation order is not notified may be set. In addition, when "RT2 transition lip" is determined as an internal winning combination in the shifted RT1 game state, "RT2 transition lip 1 and 2" will be displayed in order to shift to the RT2 game state. The navigation data in the item CZ to which is notified may be set.

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49, and executes the ART transition lottery based on the card type and the internal winning combination (S561). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART transition lottery has been won (S561). If it is determined that the ART transition lottery has been won (YES), the ART game is set from the next game (S563), and the initial value (50) is set in the number of ART games (S564).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the bell winning number lottery table for the number of ART games added lottery shown in FIG. 55, and determines the number of bell winnings (S566). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the card surplus time addition ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48, executes a lottery for the number of additional ART games for each surplus card type, and adds the number of ART games according to the lottery result. (S567), and the processing during item CZ is completed.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S562 that the ART transition lottery has not been won (that is, has not been won) (NO), the number of item CZ games is subtracted by "1" (S568), followed by , It is determined whether or not the number of item CZ games is "0" (S569). If it is determined that the number of item CZ games is "0" (YES), the normal game is set from the next game (S570), the initial value (0) is set to the number of ceiling games (S571), and the item CZ End the middle process. Further, even when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of item CZ games is not "0" (that is, "1" or more) (NO), the item CZ processing is terminated.

In the present embodiment, in the process of step S561, the ART transition lottery is performed according to the number of acquired cards and the expected degree (“LV (level)”) according to the order of card acquisition in the normal BB. However, the mode of the ART transition lottery is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of acquired cards at the time of item CZ transfer, and the expectations of these cards are different, the ART transfer lottery is performed with priority given to the card with the higher expectation. , The lottery right to rearrange the order of the cards The lottery order change process may be performed. Alternatively, the lottery right lottery order change process for rearranging the order of the cards may be performed so that the ART transition lottery is performed with priority given to the cards with lower expectations. With such a configuration, the player's expectation during a predetermined period in the item CZ (that is, the first half period or the second half period of the item CZ) can be further improved.

Further, for example, when there are a plurality of acquired cards at the time of item CZ transfer, the lottery right lottery order change process for performing a lottery to rearrange the order of the cards may be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to change the period of high expectation during the item CZ.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of lottery rights (for example, for example) having different expectations for shifting to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) during the lottery right-granting gaming state (for example, normal BB). A plurality of lottery rights can be granted from the cards), and in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), a specific advantageous gaming state is sequentially provided according to the degree of expectation corresponding to the granted lottery rights. (For example, ART game) is configured to be a transition lottery.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding the lottery for notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, the lottery for transition to the ART game). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the transition lottery of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) is won in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), the granted lottery right is surplus. Is configured to be able to add the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) based on the remaining lottery right.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of lottery rights granted (for example, the number of cards) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 8 cards) in the lottery right granting game state (for example, normal BB), a specific advantageous game It is configured to shift to a state (for example, ART game), and in this case, all the predetermined number of lottery rights are regarded as surplus lottery rights, and the number of games (for example, ART game) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) is set. The number of ART games) can be added.

With this configuration, even if a lottery right that was not used for the lottery occurs in a predetermined lottery state, the lottery right is not wasted, and a stop operation that is advantageous for the player. Since the number of games in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of is notified is increased, a lottery (for example, ART) for notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is performed. Regarding the lottery for transition to games), it is possible to further enhance the interest.

<Processing during normal game>
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a normal in-game process executed in step S441 of the start command reception process shown in FIG. 80.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is between the PBB flags (S580). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "PBB" is in the internal winning state. If it is determined that the PBB flags are between (YES), the normal in-game process ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not between the PBB flags (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the PBB has been internally elected (S581). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "PBB" is determined as the internal winning combination in this unit game. If it is determined that the PBB has been internally elected (YES), the initial value (50) is set in the number of ART games (S582), and the number of ART sets (for example, the number of ART sets "3", "4", "5" (S583), the PBB notification effect data for notifying that the PBB has won the internal winning is set (S584), and the normal in-game processing is terminated.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S581 that the PBB has not been internally elected (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not it is between the BB flags (S585). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BB1 to 4" are in the internal winning state. When it is determined that the flag is between the BB flags (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the notified flag is on (S586). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus combination (BB1 to 4) has already been internally elected and whether or not the type has been notified.
If it is determined that the notified flag is on (YES), the normal in-game process ends.

When the sub CPU 102 determines (NO) that the notified flag is not on (that is, is off) in the process of step S586, the number of precursor games is subtracted by "1" (S587), and subsequently, precursor. It is determined whether or not the number of games is "0" (S588). When it is determined that the number of precursor games is "0" (YES), the notified flag is turned on (S589), and a BB notification is notified that the bonus combination (BB1 to 4) has been internally elected and its type. The production data for the game is set (S590), and the processing during the normal game is terminated. Further, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of precursor games is not "0" (that is, "1" or more) (NO), the process proceeds to step S601.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S585 that it is not between the BB flags (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the BB has been internally elected (S591). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of "BB1 to 4" has been determined as the internal winning combination in this unit game. When it is determined that the BB has been internally elected (YES), the number of precursor games is determined based on the internal winning combination by referring to the BB winning precursor game number lottery table (S592). Although not shown, the production data for executing the continuous production according to the determined number of precursor games is set in accordance with the process of step S592.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current mode is in the battle mode (S593). If it is determined that the current mode is in the battle mode (YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned on (S594), and the process proceeds to step S588. Further, when it is determined that the current mode is not in the battle mode (that is, in the normal mode) (NO), the process proceeds to step S588. If the internally won bonus combination is the same color bonus (that is, BB1 or BB3), the process of step S594 may be performed without the process of step S593.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S591 that the BB has not been internally elected (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the BB has been internally elected (S595). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BAR matching lip" has been determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined that an internal winning combination has been won (YES), the ART game is set from the next game (S596), the initial value (50) is set in the number of ART games (S597), and the number of ART sets (for example, The number of ART sets "2", "3", "4", "5") is determined by lottery (S598).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the bell winning number lottery table for the number of ART games added lottery shown in FIG. 55, determines the number of bell winnings (S599), and notifies that the fixed combination has been internally elected. The production data is set (S600), and the normal game processing is completed.

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S595 that the final winning combination has not been internally won (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the battle mode lock flag is on (S601). If it is determined that the battle mode lock flag is on (YES), the normal in-game process ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the battle mode lock flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the notified flag is on (S602). If it is determined that the notified flag is on (YES), the normal in-game process ends.

When the sub CPU 102 determines (NO) that the notified flag is not on (that is, is off) in the process of step S602, the number of ceiling games is added by "1" (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of ceiling games is "500" (S604). When it is determined that the number of ceiling games is "500" (YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned on (S605), and the normal game processing ends.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S604 that the number of ceiling games is not "500" (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not it is between the BB flags (S585). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BB1 to 4" is in the internal winning state (including the internally winning unit game). When it is determined that it is not between the BB flags (NO), the mode transition lottery is executed based on the internal winning combination with reference to the normal medium mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59 (S607), and the normal mode transition lottery is executed based on the lottery result. Set the mode during the game and end the normal in-game process. Also, when it is determined that the BB flags are between (YES), the processing during the normal game is terminated.

In the present embodiment, in the process of step S595, it is determined whether or not the "BAR matching lip", which is a specific replay combination, has been internally elected as the definite combination, but the type of the definite combination is this. It is not limited to. For example, a specific small winning combination (for example, chance 2) may also be a definite winning combination, and it may be determined whether or not the specific small winning combination has been internally elected. In addition, when a predetermined combination (for example, normal lip 2) is internally won, it is determined by lottery whether or not to notify the specific stop operation procedure (for example, right, middle, left), and the notification is determined. If so, it may be determined that the finalist has been internally elected. In this case, if a predetermined combination (for example, normal lip 2) is internally won and the stop operation is performed in a specific stop operation procedure (for example, right, middle, left), the symbol related to the fixed combination (For example, "BAR matching lip") may be displayed on the effective line.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of step S591, it is determined that the BB has been internally elected (YES), and in the process of step S593, it is determined that the current mode is in the battle mode (YES). YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned on in the process of step S594, but when the notified flag is turned on in the process of step S589, if the current mode is in battle mode, the battle The mode lock flag may be turned on. In this case, the mode transition lottery may be performed in the process of step S607 until the number of precursor games becomes "0" without performing the process of step S606.

Further, in this case, even after the number of precursor games becomes "0", if the current mode is in the normal mode, the mode transition lottery may be performed in the process of step S607. With this configuration, it is possible to rescue a player who is unfamiliar with pressing. However, in order to intentionally avoid the BB winning by pushing and suppress the act of shifting to the battle mode, the mode transition lottery after the number of precursor games becomes "0" is shown in FIG. 59. It is desirable that the lottery is based on the lottery value having a lower winning probability than the lottery value specified in the normal medium mode transition lottery table shown in. Further, it is desirable that the result of the mode transition lottery after the number of precursor games becomes "0" is not notified to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special role (for example, BB1 to BB1 to 4) is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of precursor games until the notification that the special combination has been internally elected is determined. , It is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games has been reached, including the number of precursor games, and if it is determined that the number of ceiling games has been reached, a special role (for example, BB1 to BB) is awarded. When the special game state is controlled to the first special game state (for example, battle CZ) and it is determined that the number of ceiling games has not been reached, the special game is transferred by winning a special role (for example, BB1 to 4). It is configured to control the state to the second special gaming state (for example, normal BB).

With such a configuration, even if the player has a ceiling function, the player can fully enjoy the hobby of the precursory effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a mode transition lottery is performed based on a predetermined transition condition and a special combination (for example, BB1 to BB1-4) is determined as an internal winning combination, a specific mode (for example, a battle mode) is determined. In the case of, the special gaming state that shifts due to the winning of the special combination (for example, BB1 to BB1 to 4) is controlled to the first special gaming state (for example, battle CZ).

Further, in the present embodiment, when a special role (for example, BB1 to BB1 to 4) is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of precursor games until the notification that the special role has been internally elected is determined. Until the number of precursor games is exhausted, the mode transition lottery to a specific mode (for example, battle mode) may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a special role (for example, BB1 to BB1 to 4) is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of precursor games until the notification that the special role has been internally elected is determined. Until the number of precursor games is exhausted, the first transition probability (for example, the probability based on the lottery value specified in the normal medium mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59) is used to enter a specific mode (for example, battle mode). A mode transition lottery is configured to be performed, and after this number of precursor games is exhausted, a mode transition to a specific mode (for example, a battle mode) is performed with a second transition probability lower than the first transition probability. It may be configured so that a lottery is held.

With this configuration, the first special gaming state (for example, battle CZ), which is a relatively advantageous special gaming state, until it is announced that the special role has been internally elected or until the special role wins a prize. It can give a feeling of expectation to shift to.

<Processing when receiving a winning operation command>
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a winning operation command executed in step S413 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "BB1 to 4" is displayed (S610). That is, the sub PU102 determines whether or not the combination of any of the symbols "BB1 to 4" is displayed on the effective line. When it is determined that "BB1 to 4" is displayed (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the ART game is in progress (S611). If it is determined that the ART game is in progress (YES), the additional BB is set from the next game (S612), the initial value of the enemy type (enemy A), and the initial value of HP (60) are set (S613). ).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a stored enemy type or remaining HP (S614). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the enemy character (enemy type) has been updated in the additional BB before the previous time, or whether the HP (remaining HP) in the subtracted state in the additional BB before the previous time is held. .. If it is determined that there is a memorized enemy type or remaining HP (YES), the initial value of the enemy type (enemy A) set in step S613 and the initial value of HP (60) are replaced with. Set the stored enemy type or remaining HP (S615), and end the processing when the winning operation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 102 also ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command even when it is determined that there is no stored enemy type or remaining HP (NO).

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S611 that the ART game is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the battle mode lock flag is on (S616). If it is determined that the battle mode lock flag is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), the normal BB is set from the next game (S617), and the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command is terminated.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S616 that the battle mode lock flag is on (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the battle CZ from the next game (S618) and sets the initial value (60) of the HP. (S619), referring to the character lottery table during battle CZ shown in FIG. 29, a ally character is determined based on the set value, the type of the determined ally character is set (S620), and processing when a winning operation command is received. To finish.

When the sub CPU 102 determines (NO) that "BB1 to 4" is not displayed in the process of step S610, it subsequently determines whether or not the bell is displayed (S621). That is, the sub CPU 102 internally wins the push order small combination, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop operation procedure, and any of "upper bells 1 to 4", "cross-up bell", and "middle bell". It is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line.
In the process of step S621, it is also possible to internally win the unquestioned bell and determine whether or not any combination of symbols of "Crossdown bells 1 to 4" is displayed on the valid line. Good. If it is determined that the bell is not displayed (NO), the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command is terminated.

When the sub CPU 102 determines that the bell is displayed in the process of step S621 (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART game is in progress (S622). If it is determined that the ART game is not in progress (NO), the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command is terminated.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S622 that the ART game is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the number of bell winnings has reached the determined number (S623). If it is determined that the number of bell winnings has not reached the determined number (NO), the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command is terminated.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S623 that the number of bell winnings has reached the determined number (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the success / failure lottery table for adding the number of ART games when the number of bell winnings is reached shown in FIG. 56. Then, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is executed (S624). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery for adding the number of ART games has been won (S625). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional lottery for the number of ART games has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the number of additional ART games lottery table when the number of bell winnings is reached shown in FIG. 57, and determines the number of additional ART games. The number of ART games is stocked and stored according to the determination result (S626).

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S625 that the lottery for adding the number of ART games has not been won (that is, is not won) (NO), or if the process of step S626 is performed, then, With reference to the number of bell winning times lottery table for adding the number of ART games shown in FIG. 55, the number of bell winnings is determined again (S627), and the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, the predetermined procedure of the stop operation is to be notified. The number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) can be added according to the number of winnings of a small winning combination (for example, bell).

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to at least a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game), the number of games played in the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) (for example, ART game). The number of winnings of a predetermined small winning combination (for example, bell) to which the additional lottery will be performed is determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery is performed in which the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) of a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) is added according to the number of winnings of a predetermined small winning combination (for example, bell). If the game is broken, the number of winnings of a predetermined small winning combination (for example, bell) that will be added to the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) of a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) is determined again. It is configured to be.

With this configuration, it is possible to give an expectation of adding the number of games in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) without winning a specific small role called "rare role". ..

Further, in the present embodiment, in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game), the number of games in the specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) (for example, the number of ART games) based on the internal winning combination. ) May be added so that it can be added.

However, in this case, it is a specific combination (that is, it is a "rare role", for example, a "bonus duplicate combination" in the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49, or "chance 1" and "chance 2"). Is determined as an internal winning combination, and the probability that the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) is added is at least a predetermined small winning combination (for example, bell). It is desirable that the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) is higher than the probability of being added when is determined as the internal winning combination.

With this configuration, there is more variety in terms of adding the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) in the advantageous game state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. However, by being able to perform a lottery and not biasing the opportunity for addition, it is possible to always give a feeling of expectation of addition in a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game).

<Processing when receiving bonus end command>
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of receiving a bonus end command executed in step S417 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the end of the PBB gaming state (S640). If it is determined that it is the end of the PBB gaming state (YES), the process proceeds to step S660. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the end of the PBB gaming state (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not it is the end of the additional BB (S641). When it is determined that it is the end of the addition BB (YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special addition state flag is on (S642). When it is determined that the special addition state flag is on (YES), the special addition state flag is turned off (S643), and the enemy type is updated and stored (S644). Here, the enemy types are enemy A, enemy B, and enemy C based on the fact that the HP is "0" or less (that is, the effect of the ally character defeating the enemy character is executed) during the additional BB. , Enemy D is updated in order.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the preferential mode lock flag is on (S645). If it is determined that the preferential mode lock flag is on (YES), the preferential mode lock flag is turned off (S646), a special addition state (preferential treatment) is set from the next game (S647), and when the bonus end command is received. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the preferential mode lock flag is not on (that is, it is off) (NO), a special addition state (normal) is set from the next game (S648), and the processing when the bonus end command is received ends. To do. That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the preferential addition state is set as the preferential state based on whether or not the preferential mode lock flag is on.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S642 that the special addition state flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 stores the current enemy type and the remaining HP (S649). For example, if the enemy B is determined during the additional BB, the enemy B is stored as the enemy type so that the target enemy B is determined again during the next additional BB. In addition, if the cumulative total of HP subtraction values determined during the lottery period during the additional BB is "20", the remaining HP will be "40 (60-20)" so that the initial value of HP in the next additional BB will be "40 (60-20)". Store "40" as HP. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART game from the next game (S650), and ends the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S641 that it is not the end of the additional BB (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not it is the end of the battle CZ (S651). When it is determined that the battle CZ is at the end (YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned off (S652), and then it is determined whether or not the ART winning flag is on (S653). If it is determined that the ART winning flag is on (YES), the ART game is set from the next game (S654), the number of ART games is added, and the number of winning lottery bells is referred to the lottery table shown in FIG. The number of winnings is determined (S655), the additional ART game number display control process is executed (S656), and the process when the bonus end command is received is terminated.

In this additional ART game number display control process, the number of additional ART games determined in the process of step S518 of the battle CZ intermediate process shown in FIG. 84 and the process of step S519 of the battle CZ intermediate process shown in FIG. 84 are determined. The number of additional ART games added is to be indicated by the same effect. For example, in the process of step S518 of the battle CZ intermediate process shown in FIG. 84, the number of additional ART games is determined to be "50", and in the process of step S519 of the battle CZ intermediate process shown in FIG. 84, the additional ART is added. When the number of games (multiple) is determined to be "double", the number of ART games is "150" including the initial value "50". In this case, for example, after the initial value "50" of the number of ART games is shown, "+50" is displayed twice or "+100" is displayed to indicate the number of additional ART games. Become. Further, for example, the total number of ART games "150" may be indicated. That is, in the present embodiment, in a specific game state (for example, during battle CZ), the lottery opportunity (at the time of winning the transition lottery of the ART game or after winning the ART game) and the lottery method (how many times the number of additional ART games is multiplied). Even when a plurality of additional lottery with different lottery (lottery for how many additional ART games are used) is performed, at the end of a specific game state (for example, during battle CZ). Is configured to have a similar display.

By configuring in this way and not clearly indicating which additional lottery was added, it is possible to improve the interest in notifying the lottery result.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S653 that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game from the next game (S657) and sets the number of ceiling games. The initial value (0) is set (S658), and the processing at the time of receiving the bonus end command is terminated.

If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S651 that it is not the end of the battle CZ (NO), it is assumed that it is the end of the normal BB, and then whether or not the ART winning flag is on is determined. Judgment (S659). If it is determined that the ART winning flag is on (YES), the ART game is set from the next game (S660), the number of ART games is added, and the number of winning lottery bells is referred to the lottery table shown in FIG. The number of winnings is determined (S661), and the processing when the bonus end command is received is terminated.

When the sub CPU 102 determines (NO) that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, is off) in the process of step S659, the item CZ is set from the next game (S662), and the number of cards is set as an item. Set as the number of CZ games (S663), and end the processing when the bonus end command is received.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a lottery (for example, HP subtraction value) whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the internal winning combination in a predetermined game period (for example, additional BB) (Lottery) is performed, and when this specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, "0" or less), a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a special advantageous gaming state, a special addition state) Is configured to be granted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific numerical value (for example, HP) does not become a specific update result (for example, "0" or less), a predetermined update result (for example, remaining) which is an intermediate update result. HP) is retained, and in the next predetermined game period, it is configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not a specific update result is obtained with respect to the retained predetermined update result.

With such a configuration, even if the privilege is not given, the update result of a specific numerical value during the predetermined game period is not wasted, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to a predetermined game period (for example, additional BB) (for example, when any one of BBs 1 to 4 is determined as an internal winning combination), a specific case is specified. If the preferential conditions (for example, the preferential mode lock flag is on) are satisfied, the preferential state of granting the privilege is given, and this preferential state is configured to be maintained until the privilege is granted. ing.

With this configuration, even if the privilege is not granted, if the privilege is granted in the predetermined game period after the next time, the preferential state will be maintained, and the interest of the game will be reduced. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery (for example, a lottery for the HP subtraction value) is made to determine whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the number of consecutive winnings of the specific combination (for example, the replay combination). Is configured to be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific combination (for example, the fact that the player has won the "JAC" internally) during the predetermined special gaming state (for example, the additional BB) is used as a transition trigger. , Replay role) is configured to increase the winning probability (for example, shift to the RT2 gaming state during BB).

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding the granting of predetermined benefits (for example, transition to a special advantageous gaming state, a special addition state).

As described above, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide at least the gaming machines according to the first to tenth inventions shown below.

[Game machine according to the first invention]
In recent years, the point selection table is referred to during the bonus (for example, BB) operation, points are accumulated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points. There is a known gaming machine that notifies the above (for example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

However, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, a point indicating whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is simply determined by a lottery based on the internal winning combination, and thus a bonus. There was a problem that the game during operation became monotonous.

The first invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding a lottery as to whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

The first invention comprises a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) that start the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol variation stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. The special game state control means (for example, for example, BB) is controlled based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) displayed on the symbol display means. An advantageous game that controls a bonus operation check process by the main CPU 93 and a process when a winning operation command is received by the sub CPU 102) and a specific advantageous game state (for example, an ART game) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. The advantageous game state lottery means includes a state control means (for example, a sub CPU 102) and an advantageous game state lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 102) for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state. In the special gaming state, when a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) is continuously determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or more by the internal winning combination determining means, it is expected to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state. A lottery right is granted from a plurality of types of lottery rights (for example, LV1 to LV7 cards) having different degrees, and after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery right is shifted to a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), and the predetermined lottery is performed. It is a gaming machine characterized by drawing a lottery based on the lottery right granted in the state, whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state.

Further, the first invention is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state lottery means further grants the lottery right in the special gaming state based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. It is the game machine described above.

Further, in the first invention, in the advantageous gaming state lottery means, the number of lottery rights (for example, the number of cards) granted in the special gaming state is a predetermined number (for example, "8 cards") or more. In the case of the above-described game, the game is characterized in that it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state without shifting to the predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) after the end of the special gaming state. It is a machine.

Further, in the first invention, the special gaming state control means determines the internal winning combination based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special gaming state (for example, the internal winning combination is "JAC"). From the specific combination low probability state (for example, RT0 game state in BB) in which the probability that the specific combination is determined by the means is low, the specific combination high probability state in which the probability that the specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means is high. (For example, if the player shifts to the RT2 gaming state during BB) and shifts to the specific winning combination high probability state when the special gaming state ends, at least in the predetermined lottery state, the specific winning combination height The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the probability state is inherited (for example, the RT2 gaming state is set in step S155 of FIG. 69).

According to the gaming machine according to the first invention, a more diverse lottery is conducted regarding a lottery for notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, a lottery for transition to ART game). It can be carried out.

[Game machine according to the second invention]

In recent years, the point selection table is referred to during the bonus (for example, BB) operation, points are accumulated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points. There is a known gaming machine that notifies the above (for example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

However, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, a point indicating whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is simply determined by a lottery based on the internal winning combination, and thus a bonus. There was a problem that the game during operation became monotonous.

Further, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, the bonus is configured so that the operation is terminated when a predetermined number of medals are paid out. Therefore, for example, if a predetermined small winning combination is won during the bonus operation, but it is possible to perform a stop operation so as not to win the predetermined small winning combination, the number of point lottery is intentionally increased. There was a problem that it became possible and the amusement store could suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

The second invention has been made in view of such a point, and whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player while appropriately balancing the interests of the player and the game store. The purpose of the lottery is to provide a game machine capable of conducting a more diverse lottery.

The second invention comprises a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) that start the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol variation stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. The special game state control means (for example, for example, BB) is controlled based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) displayed on the symbol display means. An advantageous game that controls a bonus operation check process by the main CPU 93 and a process when a winning operation command is received by the sub CPU 102) and a specific advantageous game state (for example, an ART game) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. The special gaming state control means includes a state control means (for example, a sub CPU 102) and an advantageous game state lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 102) for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state. In the special gaming state, a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined small combination (for example, "pushing order small combination" and "RB medium / small combination") (for example, a combination of symbols related to "bell") becomes the symbol display means. When the predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) is displayed, the special gaming state is terminated, and the advantageous gaming state lottery means has a predetermined lottery period (for example, the number of times the lottery can be drawn is "5"" in the special gaming state. When a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) is continuously determined a specific number of times (for example, 5 times) or more by the internal winning combination determining means during the period (less than the period), the game shifts to the specific advantageous gaming state. A lottery right is granted from a plurality of types of lottery rights (for example, LV1 to LV7 cards) having different expectations, and after the end of the special gaming state, the lottery right is shifted to a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), and the predetermined lottery state is set. In the lottery state, based on the lottery right granted, a lottery is made as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and during the predetermined lottery period, the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state. The number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by Is terminated based on the predetermined number of times, and in the predetermined small winning combination, the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined small winning combination is not displayed on the symbol display means according to the procedure of the player's stop operation. It is a gaming machine characterized by including a specific small combination (for example, "pushing order small combination").

Further, in the second invention, the advantageous gaming state lottery means further, in the special gaming state, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means during the predetermined lottery period. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that a lottery right is granted.

Further, in the second invention, in the advantageous gaming state lottery means, the number of lottery rights (for example, the number of cards) granted in the special gaming state is a predetermined number (for example, "8 cards") or more. In the case of the above-described game, the game is characterized in that it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state without shifting to the predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) after the end of the special gaming state. It is a machine.

Further, in the second invention, the special gaming state control means determines the internal winning combination based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special gaming state (for example, the internal winning of "JAC"). The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the probability that the specific combination is determined by means is increased.

According to the game machine according to the second invention, a lottery (for example, to ART game) is made to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player while appropriately balancing the profits of the player and the game shop. It is possible to carry out a more diverse lottery regarding the transition lottery).

[Game machine according to the third invention]
In recent years, a player refers to a point selection table during a predetermined gaming state (for example, during BB operation), accumulates points by lottery based on an internal winning combination, and according to the accumulated points, a player after the end of the predetermined gaming state. There are known gaming machines that determine whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the prior art (for example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

However, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, since the above-mentioned points are simply determined by a lottery based on the internal winning combination, whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. There was a problem that the lottery became monotonous.

The third invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding a lottery as to whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

The third invention comprises a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) that start the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. A symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the variation of the symbol to be performed, and a specific advantageous gaming state (for example,) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. , ART game), and an advantageous game state lottery means (for example, sub CPU 102) for controlling whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous game state. The advantageous game state lottery means has a plurality of types of lottery rights (for example, LV1 to LV7 cards) having different expectations for shifting to the specific advantageous game state in a predetermined lottery right granting game state (for example, normal BB). It is possible to grant a plurality of lottery rights from among the above, and after the end of the predetermined lottery right granting game state, the user shifts to a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), and in the predetermined lottery state, the plurality of granted Based on the lottery right, whether or not to sequentially shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is drawn, and when it is decided to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is performed. The lottery right that was not used in the lottery is regarded as a surplus lottery right, and the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is added based on the surplus lottery right (for example, the addition shown in step S567 of FIG. 86). It is a gaming machine characterized in that it executes a lottery for the number of ART games).

Further, in the third invention, in the advantageous game state lottery means, the number of the lottery rights (for example, the number of cards) granted in the predetermined lottery right granting game state is a predetermined number (for example, "8 cards"). In the case of the above, the specific transition condition is satisfied, and the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is added by using the predetermined number or more of the lottery rights as the surplus lottery rights (for example, FIG. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the lottery for the number of additional ART games shown in step S544 of 85 is executed).

Further, in the third invention, the advantageous gaming state lottery means determines the number of games to be added in the specific advantageous gaming state according to the expectation of the surplus lottery right, and the expectation is high. The above description is characterized in that the number of games to be added in the specific advantageous gaming state increases (for example, the lottery value specified in the number of additional ART games lottery table when the card is left over as shown in FIG. 48). It is a game machine of.

According to the gaming machine according to the third invention, a more diverse lottery regarding a lottery for notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, a lottery for transition to ART game) is performed. It can be carried out.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the third invention, even if a lottery right that is not used for the lottery occurs in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), the lottery right is not wasted. Moreover, since the number of games in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified is increased, the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is increased. It is possible to further enhance the interest in the lottery for whether or not to notify (for example, the lottery for transition to ART games).

[Game machine according to the fourth invention]
In recent years, the point selection table is referred to during the bonus (for example, BB) operation, points are accumulated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points. There is a known gaming machine that notifies the above (for example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

However, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, a point indicating whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is simply determined by a lottery based on the internal winning combination, and thus a bonus. There was a problem that the game during operation became monotonous.

The fourth invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding a lottery as to whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

The fourth invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) that start the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol to be performed, and the symbol fluctuation stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. The special game state control means (for example, the battle CZ) is controlled based on the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, the bonus combination) displayed on the symbol display means. An advantageous game that controls a bonus operation check process by the main CPU 93 and a process when a winning operation command is received by the sub CPU 102) and a specific advantageous game state (for example, an ART game) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. The advantageous game state lottery means includes a state control means (for example, a sub CPU 102) and an advantageous game state lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 102) for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state. In the special game state, a character is determined from a plurality of characters (for example, characters A to C), and in the special game state, a predetermined lottery period (for example, a period in which the number of lottery possible times is less than "5"). In the first lottery (for example, FIG. 84), whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the determined character and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Step S504 (lottery), and in the special game state, the number of times (for example, replay) in which the determined character and the specific combination (for example, replay combination) are continuously determined during the predetermined lottery period A second lottery (for example, the lottery in step S508 of FIG. 84) for whether or not to update the specific numerical value is performed based on the number of consecutive times), and in the special gaming state, the first lottery and the first lottery are performed. As a result of the lottery of 2, when the specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, HP is "0" or less), the gaming machine is characterized in that it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state. is there.

Further, in the fourth invention, the special game state control means is a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined small combination (for example, "pushing order small combination" and "RB small / medium combination") in the special game state (for example, , "Combination of symbols related to" bell ") is displayed on the symbol display means a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the special gaming state is terminated, and the predetermined lottery period is in the special gaming state. , The number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means ends based on the predetermined number of times, and the predetermined small winning combination is the said according to the procedure of the player's stop operation. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined small combination includes a specific small combination (for example, "pushing order small combination") that is not displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, in the fourth invention, the special gaming state control means determines the internal winning combination based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special gaming state (for example, the internal winning of "JAC"). The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the probability that the specific combination is determined by means is increased.

According to the gaming machine according to the fourth invention, a more diverse lottery is conducted regarding a lottery for notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, a lottery for transition to an ART game). It can be carried out.

[Game machine according to the fifth invention]
In recent years, the point selection table is referred to during the bonus (for example, BB) operation, points are accumulated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points. There is a known gaming machine that notifies the above (for example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

However, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, a point indicating whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is simply determined by a lottery based on the internal winning combination, and thus a bonus. There was a problem that the game during operation became monotonous.

The fifth invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding a lottery as to whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

A fifth invention comprises a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) that start the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol fluctuation stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. A special game state control means (for example, for example) that controls the special game state (for example, battle CZ) based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a bonus combination) displayed on the symbol display means. A bonus operation check process by the main CPU 93 and a process when a winning operation command is received by the sub CPU 102) and an advantageous game that controls a specific advantageous game state (for example, an ART game) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. The advantageous game state lottery means includes a state control means (for example, a sub CPU 102) and an advantageous game state lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 102) for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state. During a predetermined lottery period (for example, a period in which the number of possible lottery is less than "5"), a specific numerical value (for example, HP) is updated based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When a lottery for whether or not (for example, the lottery in step S504 of FIG. 84) is performed and the specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, HP is "0" or less) as a result of the lottery, the specific number is specified. Based on the number of times (for example, the number of times a lottery is possible) that a predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the predetermined lottery period, the specific advantageous game is determined. Whether or not to add the number of games in the state is determined (for example, the determination in step S519 in FIG. 84), and the predetermined lottery period is the predetermined small winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state. Is a gaming machine characterized in that the game is terminated based on the number of times determined by the number of times is a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times).

Further, in the fifth invention, the special game state control means is based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the special game state (for example, the bonus end number counter is less than "0"). After ending the special gaming state and determining that the advantageous gaming state lottery means shifts to the specific advantageous gaming state in the special gaming state, the special gaming state controlling means causes the special gaming state to change. Until the end, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the determination in step S518 of FIG. 84). The game machine described above, which is characterized by the above.

Further, in the fifth invention, the number of games in the specific advantageous game state is added based on the number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means by the advantageous game state lottery means. (For example, when the number of additional ART games is added by the determination in step S519 of FIG. 84) and the game in the specific advantageous gaming state based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the number of times is added (for example, when the number of additional ART games is added by the determination of step S518 in FIG. 84), the same display is performed and the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is added. The gaming machine according to the above, further comprising a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11) for notifying the fact.

Further, in the fifth invention, in the advantageous gaming state lottery means, in the special gaming state, a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) is continuously performed by the internal winning combination determining means during the predetermined lottery period. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to update the specific numerical value based on the number of times determined (for example, the number of consecutive replays).

According to the gaming machine according to the fifth invention, a more diverse lottery is conducted regarding a lottery for notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, a lottery for transition to ART game). It can be carried out.

[Game machine according to the sixth invention]
In recent years, based on the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to perform control that invalidates the operation by the player for a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as "lock"), and if lock control is performed, the type is selected. There are known gaming machines that determine whether or not to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Prior Art Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-201820).

Further, in the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 2, whether it is in the RT1 operating state (hereinafter referred to as "replay low probability state") or in the RT2 operating state (hereinafter referred to as "replay high probability state"). Correspondingly, the type of lock control is determined using different lottery tables.

By the way, a gaming machine as shown in Prior Art Document 2 may be provided with a predetermined lottery state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, ART game) that is advantageous to the player.

When such a predetermined lottery state is provided, if there is a possibility of shifting from the replay low probability state to the replay high probability state or from the replay high probability state to the replay low probability state during the predetermined lottery state, the transition is made. It will be necessary to store the lottery table as described above for the amount of the gaming state that may be played.

That is, when the winning probability of a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) fluctuates during a predetermined lottery state, there is a problem that the number of lottery tables increases and the storage area is compressed.

The sixth invention has been made in view of such a point, and the winning probability of a specific combination varies in a predetermined lottery state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of performing an appropriate lottery without squeezing a storage area even when there is a possibility.

A sixth invention comprises a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) that start the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol to be performed and the internal winning combination determining means specify a specific combination (for example, a replay combination "RT2 maintenance lip". A high probability state in which the probability of determining the specific combination is high (for example, RT2 gaming state) and a low probability state in which the probability that the specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means is low (for example, Probabilistic state control means (for example, main) which has RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state and controls transition between the high probability state and the low probability state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition. Advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102) that controls the state management process and the bonus end check process by the CPU 93 and the specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player is notified. ), And an advantageous game state lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 102) that draws whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous game state, and the advantageous game state lottery means is said to be high by the probability state control means. A predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) can be executed regardless of whether the state is controlled to the probability state or the low probability state, and in the predetermined lottery state, the internal winning combination determining means Based on the determined internal winning combination and a specific lottery table (for example, the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49), a lottery is made as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and the specific lottery is performed. The table shifts to the specific advantageous gaming state when at least the specific combination and the predetermined combination (for example, "missing") determined with high probability in the low probability state are determined as the internal winning combination. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the probability of being determined to be to be determined is the lowest (for example, the lottery value specified in the "Other" column in the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49).

According to the gaming machine according to the sixth invention, a lottery table used in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) in which whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, ART game) advantageous to the player is determined. It is possible to reduce the number of storage areas and prevent the storage area from being compressed.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth invention, from a high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state) in which the probability that the player intentionally determines a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) is high. Even if the player shifts to a low-probability state (for example, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) in which the probability that a specific combination is determined is low, an advantageous lottery will not be received. It is possible to appropriately draw whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, ART gaming) that is advantageous to the player.

That is, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth invention, there is a possibility that the winning probability of a specific combination may fluctuate in a predetermined lottery state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Even so, an appropriate lottery can be performed without squeezing the storage area.

[Game machine according to the seventh invention]
In recent years, during a predetermined game period (for example, battle production) in which the main character battles with an enemy character, the action form of the main character is determined, and a specific numerical value (for example, physical strength point) is determined according to the determined action form. ) Is updated, and the gaming machine that grants a predetermined privilege (for example, generates a specific game) knows based on the fact that the update result becomes a specific update result (for example, "0"). (For example, Prior Art Document 3: JP-A-2004-97564).

However, in the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 3, if a specific numerical value does not become a specific update result in a predetermined game period, the update result in the middle is not reflected in the subsequent game. Since it is wasted, there is a problem that the interest of the game after the end of the predetermined game period may be lowered.

Further, in the game machine shown in the prior art document 3, even if a specific numerical value becomes a specific update result, only a predetermined privilege is uniformly given, so that there is diversity in granting the privilege. There was a problem of lacking.

The seventh invention has been made in view of such a point, and when a specific numerical value is updated in a predetermined game period and the update result becomes a specific update result, a predetermined privilege is given. Even if the renewal result does not result in a specific renewal result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating and to conduct a more diverse lottery regarding the granting of benefits. The purpose is to provide a game machine.

The seventh invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) that start the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. Based on the symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the variation of the symbol and the predetermined transition condition are satisfied, a predetermined advantageous gaming state (for example, for example). An advantageous game state control means (for example, a bonus operation check process by the main CPU 93 and a process when a winning operation command is received by the sub CPU 102) and a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a special additional state) are given to the additional BB). Whether or not to increase the profit given by the privilege granting lottery means (for example, sub CPU 102) and the privilege granting means, when the predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. (For example, whether or not the preferential mode lock flag is turned on) is provided with a preferential determination means (for example, sub CPU 102), and the privilege granting lottery means is the internal winning in the predetermined advantageous gaming state. Based on the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means, a lottery for whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) is performed (for example, the lottery in step S473 of FIG. 82), and as a result of the lottery, the above-mentioned If the specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, HP is "0" or less) before the predetermined advantageous gaming state ends, the predetermined privilege is given, while the specific numerical value is the said. When the predetermined advantageous gaming state ends without becoming a specific update result, the predetermined update result (for example, the remaining HP) which is the update result in the middle is retained, and the predetermined update result is retained. In the case, in the predetermined advantageous gaming state, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a lottery is made to determine whether or not the specific updating result will be obtained with respect to the predetermined updating result. In the preferential treatment determination means, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, if the specific preferential condition is satisfied (for example, if the preferential mode lock flag is on), the preferential treatment granting means causes the predetermined privilege. Will be increased until the above-mentioned benefits are granted. It is a game machine characterized by being fixed.

Further, the seventh invention is based on the fact that the special game state control means satisfies a predetermined end condition in the special game state (for example, the bonus end number counter becomes less than "0"). After the special gaming state is terminated and the advantageous gaming state lottery means satisfies the specific transition condition in the special gaming state, until the special gaming state is terminated by the special gaming state control means. Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, determination in step S518 of FIG. 84). It is the game machine described above.

Further, in the seventh invention, in the advantageous game control means, the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means, and the combination of the first symbols (for example, the same color bonus) is related. Based on the fact that the symbol combination) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first advantageous gaming state is controlled, and the symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Based on the fact that the combination of the second symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to the different color bonus) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second advantageous gaming state is controlled, and the preferential treatment determination means changes the symbols. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the specific preferential conditions are established based on being controlled to the first advantageous gaming state by the stop control means (for example, internally winning the same color bonus). Is.

Further, in the seventh invention, in the privilege granting lottery means, the number of times (for example, a replay combination) in which a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the predetermined advantageous gaming state is further determined. , The above-described gaming machine, characterized in that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to update the specific numerical value based on the number of consecutive replays.

According to the gaming machine according to the seventh invention, a specific numerical value (for example, HP) is updated in a predetermined game period (for example, additional BB), and the update result is a specific update result (for example, HP is "0". In the case of a gaming machine that grants a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a special addition state) in the case of (below), even if the update result does not become a specific update result, the interest of the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to conduct a more diverse lottery regarding the granting of benefits.

[Game machine according to the eighth invention]
In recent years, when a specific small winning combination with a relatively low winning probability, which is called a so-called "rare role", is determined as an internal winning combination, a specific advantage in which a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player is notified. There is a known gaming machine that adds the number of games played in the game state (for example, the number of ART games) (for example, Prior Art Document 4: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-220271).

By the way, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 4, the winning probability is relatively high, and when a normal small winning combination for increasing medals in a specific advantageous gaming state is determined as an internal winning combination, a specific advantageous is given. The number of games played in the game state is not added.

Further, from the viewpoint of maintaining an appropriate ball output rate, in general, in a game machine as shown in Prior Art Document 4, the above-mentioned specific small winning combination is set to have an extremely low winning probability. There are many.

Therefore, in many cases, the specific advantageous gaming state described above is not determined as the internal winning combination even once, and the specific advantageous gaming state ends. In such a case, the player plays the game in the specific advantageous gaming state. There was a problem that it was not possible to have the expectation of increasing the number of times, and on the contrary, the interest of the game could be reduced.

The eighth invention has been made in view of such a point, and in the advantageous gaming state in which the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified, the number of games is not required to win a specific small winning combination. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can give a feeling of additional expectation.

The eighth invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) for starting the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. A symbol variation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the variation of the symbol to be performed, and a specific advantageous gaming state (for example,) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. , ART game) control advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102), and additional lottery means (for example, sub CPU 102) for drawing whether or not to add the number of games in the specific advantageous game state. The additional lottery means determines the specific number of winnings (for example, the number of bell winnings) of a predetermined small winning combination (for example, push order small winning combination) when it is determined to control the specific advantageous gaming state. Then, in the specific advantageous gaming state, whether or not to add the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state based on the number of winnings of the predetermined small winning combination becoming the determined specific winning number. (For example, the lottery shown in step S624 of FIG. 88 is performed), and the predetermined small winning combination is a small winning combination to which the procedure of the stop operation is notified. ..

Further, in the eighth invention, the additional lottery means is based on the fact that the number of winnings of the predetermined small winning combination becomes the determined number of winnings in the specific advantageous gaming state. The game according to the above description, wherein the specific number of winnings is determined again (for example, the lottery shown in step S627 of FIG. 88 is performed) when a lottery is made to decide whether or not to add the number of games in the advantageous game state. It is a machine.

Further, in the eighth invention, the additional lottery means further, in the specific advantageous gaming state, the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Was drawn by lottery, and a specific winning combination (for example, "chance 1" and "chance 2") different from the predetermined small winning combination was determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. In this case, the probability that the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is determined to be added is determined when the predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. The probability that the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means is higher than the probability that the number of games is added to the number of games, and the predetermined small winning combination is internally won by the internal winning combination determining means. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is lower than the probability of being determined as a combination.

According to the gaming machine according to the eighth invention, in an advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, a specific small combination (for example, a so-called "rare combination") Even if you don't win the game, you can give a feeling of expectation of adding the number of games (for example, the number of ART games).

[Game machine according to the ninth invention]
In recent years, during the period when the bonus is not internally won, the ceiling flag is turned on when certain conditions are met, and when the ceiling flag is on, the winning bonus is regarded as a more advantageous bonus game, so-called ceiling. A gaming machine having a function is known (for example, Prior Art Document 5: JP-A-2004-215990).

Further, in such a game machine, when the bonus is internally won, it is common that a precursory effect suggesting the internal winning of the bonus is executed over a plurality of games until the bonus is won.

By the way, in such a game machine, for example, if the bonus is internally won just before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the precursor effect is started immediately before the predetermined condition is satisfied. In such a case, the start of the precursory effect, which should originally raise the player's expectation, may rather discourage the player.

That is, in such a game machine, there is a problem that the player may not fully enjoy the interest of the precursory effect.

The ninth invention has been made in view of such a point, and provides a gaming machine capable of fully enjoying the interest of the precursory effect even when the player has a ceiling function. With the goal.

A ninth aspect of the invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) that start the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol variation stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. A special game state control that controls a special game state (for example, battle CZ or normal BB) based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a bonus combination) displayed on the symbol display means. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the means (for example, the bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and the processing when the winning operation command is received by the sub CPU 102) and the internal winning combination determining means, the number of precursor games is determined. Based on the precursor game number determining means to be determined (for example, the determination in step S592 of FIG. 87) and the precursor game number determined by the precursor game number determining means, the continuous effect is executed and the final of the continuous effect is executed. In the game, the effect executing means for notifying that the special combination has been determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11), and the number of games after the end of the special gaming state. The special game state control means includes a determination means (for example, determination in step S604 of FIG. 87) for determining whether or not the number of ceiling games (for example, "500") has been reached. When it is determined that the number of ceiling games has been reached, the special gaming state is controlled to the first special gaming state (for example, battle CZ), and the number of ceiling games has not been reached by the determination means. If it is determined, the special gaming state is controlled to the second special gaming state (for example, normal BB), and the determination means has the special combination inside by the notification means after the end of the special gaming state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games has been reached based on the number of games until the notification that the winning combination has been determined.

Further, the ninth invention further includes a mode determining means (for example, the lottery in step S607 of FIG. 87) for determining a mode from a plurality of modes based on whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. In the game in which the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the mode determined by the mode determining means is a specific mode (for example, a battle mode) in the special game state control means. In this case, the gaming machine described above is characterized in that the special gaming state is controlled to the first special gaming state regardless of the determination result by the determination means.

Further, in the ninth invention, in the game until the mode determining means is notified by the effect executing means that the special combination has been determined as the internal winning combination, the first transition probability (for example, FIG. Based on the probability based on the lottery value specified in the normal medium mode transition lottery table shown in 59), it is determined whether or not to shift to the specific mode, and the special combination is used as the internal winning combination by the effect executing means. In the game after the determination is announced, the specific mode is based on the second transition probability, which is less likely to be determined to shift to the specific mode than the first transition probability. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it determines whether or not to shift to.

Further, the ninth invention further includes an advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 102) for controlling a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified. The first special gaming state is a gaming state in which a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and the second special gaming state is whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it is in a gaming state in which a lottery right (for example, a card) is drawn for the lottery.

According to the game machine according to the present invention, the player can fully enjoy the hobby of the precursory effect even when the game machine has the ceiling function.

[Game machine according to the tenth invention]
In recent years, there are known game machines to which a predetermined privilege is given based on the fact that the replay combination has won a prize a predetermined number of times in a row (for example, Prior Art Document 6: JP-A-2010-51510).

Further, in recent years, when a specific replay is won, it is determined whether or not to perform control that invalidates the operation by the player for a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as "lock"), and if lock control is performed, it is determined. , A game machine to which a predetermined privilege is given is known (for example, Prior Art Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-201820).

By the way, for example, in the game machine shown in the prior art document 6, it is conceivable to perform an effect of invalidating the operation by the player for a predetermined period by performing the lock control as shown in the prior art document 2. ..

However, with such a configuration, there is a problem that the control load is significantly increased because it is determined whether or not to perform lock control each time the replay combination wins a prize or according to the number of consecutive winnings. It was.

The tenth invention has been made in view of such a point, and increases the control burden regarding the granting of benefits in a gaming machine that grants benefits based on the consecutive winning of a specific combination. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of performing an effect of invalidating an operation by a player for a predetermined period.

The tenth invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. The internal lottery process by the CPU 93), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) that start the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol display means. The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, reel stop control process and reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol variation stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Then, based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, the replay combination) being displayed on the symbol display means, the re-game operating means (for example, the bonus operation by the main CPU 93) that activates the re-game in the next game. Between the check process and the medal reception / start check process) and the time when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the specific combination is displayed on the symbol display means until the symbol change can be started by the symbol change start control means. , The re-game operation waiting time setting means (for example, the process of step S53 in FIG. 65) for setting the re-game operation waiting time (for example, the replay operation recognition time) for operating the re-game, and the internal winning combination determination. The replay operation waiting time is provided with a privilege granting means (for example, sub CPU 102) for granting a predetermined privilege based on the number of times the specific combination is continuously determined by the means (for example, the number of consecutive replays). The setting means is a gaming machine characterized in that the re-game operation waiting time is set according to the number of times the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining means.

Further, the tenth invention includes an advantageous game state control means (for example, a sub CPU 102) for controlling a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified, and the re- A notification means (for example, a speaker) for notifying that the re-game is activated by the game operation means is further provided, and the notification means re-plays by the re-game operation means during the re-game operation waiting time. It is possible to notify that the game is activated (for example, it is possible to output an automatic input sound), and the privilege granting means reaches the number of times that the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Based on the above-described gaming machine, as the predetermined privilege, a lottery right (for example, a card) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is granted. is there.

According to the gaming machine according to these inventions, regarding the granting of benefits, it is possible to perform an effect (for example, a lock effect) in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined period without increasing the control burden.

Further, in the tenth invention, the symbol variation stop control means stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, the bonus combination) is used as the symbol display means. A special game state control means (for example, a bonus operation check process by the main CPU 93 and a winning operation command reception process by the sub CPU 102) for controlling the special game state (for example, normal BB) based on what is displayed is provided. The special game state control means is based on the fact that the transition combination (for example, RB in BB) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state. It shifts to a specific combination high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state in BB) in which the probability that the specific combination is determined is high, and in the specific combination high probability state, it is displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol variation stop control means. The specific combination with a low probability that the specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped and the combination of symbols corresponding to the transition combination is displayed on the symbol display means. The number of times the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times the specific combination is continuously determined in the special gaming state by shifting to a low probability state (for example, the RB gaming state during BB) For example, when the number of times is 5) or more, the predetermined privilege is given, and the number of times the specific combination is continuously determined by the internal winning combination determining means is the predetermined number of times in the replay operation waiting time setting means. If the number of times is less than the number of times, the first re-game operation waiting time (for example, "270" as the value of the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer) is set, and the specific winning combination is continuously played by the internal winning combination determining means. When the determined number of times is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, the second re-game operation waiting time (for example, "540" as the value of the automatic input interval waiting time timer) is longer than the first re-game operation waiting time. ) Is set, and in the specific combination high probability state, the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the transition combination is used as the symbol display means. Based on what is displayed, a lock control means (for example, a game by the main CPU 93) that performs lock control for a specific time shorter than the first re-game operation waiting time (for example, “268” as the value of the lock timer) The game described above, which further comprises a lock execution process at the end. It is a machine.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in a special gaming state (for example, normal BB), it is difficult to give a predetermined privilege, so that the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined period (for example, a lock effect). It can be made to be recognized by the player depending on the execution time.

According to the gaming machine according to the tenth invention, in a gaming machine that grants a privilege based on consecutive winning of a specific combination (for example, a replay combination), the control burden is not increased with respect to the granting of the privilege. An effect (for example, a lock effect) that invalidates the operation by the player for a predetermined period can be performed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto. That is, the specific configuration of each means provided in the present invention is not limited to the examples adopted in the above-described embodiment, and can be arbitrarily modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 are adopted as the symbol display means, but a liquid crystal display device may be used instead of or in combination with the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. That is, the image of the design displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be variablely displayed. Further, the display window 4 is configured as a plurality of display windows 4L, 4C, 4R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and is arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. A part of the design may be displayed.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the internal winning combination determination means, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value generated by the random number generator 98 and performs the internal lottery process, but instead of this, or At the same time, the random number value may be acquired by using a random number generation circuit (not shown) built in the main CPU 93.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation of the player, the start switch 79 for detecting the operation on the start lever 23 is adopted, and the stop operation for detecting the stop operation of the player is adopted. As the detection means, the stop switch board 80 for detecting the operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is adopted, but a touch panel switch may be used instead of or in combination with this.

Further, for example, the various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 93 or the sub CPU 102 shown in the present embodiment are appropriately changed in their management modes without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be done. For example, various counters and various timers managed by "addition" may be managed by "subtraction", and in this case, the judgment as to whether or not it is "~ or more" is "~ or less". The judgment as to whether or not it is "more than" shall be read as the judgment as to whether or not it is "less than".
Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by "subtraction" may be managed by "addition", and in this case, the determination of whether or not it is "~ or less" is "~". It shall be read as a judgment as to whether or not it is "more than", and a judgment as to whether or not it is "less than" shall be read as a judgment as to whether or not it is "more than".

Further, for example, the various counters and various timers shown in the present embodiment controlled by the control of the main CPU 93 may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. , Various counters and various timers managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 93 within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention.

Further, for example, the various gaming states managed by the control of the main CPU 93 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. The various gaming states managed by the control of the main CPU 93 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 93 as long as the gist of the present invention is not deviated.

All the inventions described in the present embodiment can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention.

1 Pachislot machine 3L, 3C, 3R reel 4 Display window (design display area)
23 Start lever 19L, 19C, 19R Stop button 91 Main control circuit 101 Sub control circuit 93 Main CPU
95 main RAM
101 sub CPU
103 sub RAM

Claims (3)

A symbol display means for variable display of multiple symbols in multiple columns,
Internal winning combination determination means to determine internal winning combination,
A stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the stop operation of the player and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means.
A special game state control means for controlling a special game state based on the establishment of a special condition,
An advantageous game state control means for controlling a specific advantageous game state in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified, and
In the special gaming state, the privilege granting determination means capable of deciding whether or not to grant the privilege is provided.
The means for determining the granting of benefits is
In the special game state, a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to update a specific numerical value.
When the specific advantageous gaming state is not controlled, if the specific numerical value results in a specific update result, it is determined to grant a privilege that enables the transition to the specific advantageous gaming state.
When controlled to the specific advantageous gaming state, if the specific numerical value becomes the specific update result, it is determined to grant a privilege that enables the addition of the gaming period of the specific advantageous gaming state. ,
When the specific advantageous gaming state is controlled and the special gaming state ends without the specific numerical value becoming the specific update result, the update result in the middle is the next special gaming state. to be held,
Character determination capable of determining which of a plurality of characters including at least the first character and the second character is to be displayed in the special gaming state when controlled to the specific advantageous gaming state. With more means
When the specific advantageous gaming state is controlled and the special gaming state ends without the specific numerical value becoming the specific update result, the type of character determined to be displayed will also be the next time. A gaming machine characterized in that it is held up to the special gaming state of the above . It is possible to refer to a plurality of different tables in the specific lottery performed when the specific advantageous gaming state is not controlled and the specific lottery performed when the specific advantageous gaming state is controlled. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that it is possible. Provided with a preferential deciding means capable of deciding whether or not to give preferential treatment to the addition of the gaming period of the specific advantageous gaming state.
When it is decided to make the preferential state, the preferential state is maintained until it is decided to grant the privilege that enables the addition of the gaming period of the specific advantageous gaming state in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.

Images